3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual

DCT880
Manual
DCT880 Thyristor power controller (20 A … 4160 A)

3
Safety Instructions
Chapter overview
This chapter contains the safety instructions you must follow when installing, operating and servicing the
thyristor power controller. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or damage may occur to the thyristor
power controller or the connected equipment. Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit.
To which products this chapter applies
The information is valid for the whole range of the product DCT880.
Usage of warnings and notes
There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and notes. Warnings caution you
about conditions, which can result in serious injury or death and/or damage to the equipment, and advice on
how to avoid the danger. Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:
Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage, which can cause physical injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment.
General danger warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity, which
can result in physical injury or death and/or damage to the equipment.
Electrostatic sensitive devices warning warns of electrostatic discharge, which can damage
the equipment.
Installation and maintenance work

These warnings are intended for all who work on the thyristor power controller, the cables or the connected
equipment. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death and/or damage to the equipment.
WARNING!
Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the thyristor power
controller!
 Never work on the thyristor power controller, the cables or the connected equipment when
main power is applied. Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least
1 Mohm) that:
1. Voltage between thyristor power controller input phases U1, V1, W1 and the frame is
close to 0 V.
2. Voltage between thyristor power controller output phases U2, V2, W2 and the frame is
close to 0 V.
 Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the thyristor power controller or
to the external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause dangerous
voltages inside the thyristor power controller even when the main power on the thyristor
power controller is switched off.
 Do not make any insulation resistance or voltage withstand tests on the thyristor power
controller.
 Isolate the cables to the equipment from the thyristor power controller when testing the
insulation resistance or voltage withstand of the cables or the equipment.
 When reconnecting the cables to the equipment, always check that the U2, V2 and W2
cables are connected with the proper terminal.
Notes:
 The output phase cable terminals on the thyristor power controller are at a dangerously high
voltage when the main power is on.
 Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V) may be
present on the relay outputs of the thyristor power controller (e.g. XRO1 … XRO3).
 DCT880 with enclosure extension: Before working on the thyristor power controller, isolate
the whole thyristor power controller system from the supply.
Safety Instructions
3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

4
Grounding
These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the thyristor power controller.
Incorrect grounding can cause physical injury, death and/or equipment malfunction and increase
electromagnetic interference.
WARNING!
 Ground the thyristor power controller, the connected equipment and adjoining devices to
ensure personnel safety in all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and
pick-up.
 Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized and marked as required by safety
regulations.
 In a multiple thyristor power controller installation, connect each thyristor power controller
separately to protective earth (PE).
 Minimize EMC emission and make a 360° high frequency grounding (e.g. conductive
sleeves) of screened cable entries at the cabinet lead-through plate.
Notes:
 Power cable shields are suitable as equipment grounding conductors only when adequately
sized to meet safety regulations.
 As the normal leakage current of the thyristor power controller is higher than 3.5 mAAC or
10 mADC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective earth connection is required.
Printed circuit boards

These instructions are intended for all who handle the circuit boards. Ignoring the following instructions can
cause damage to the equipment.
WARNING!
The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Wear a
grounding wristband when handling the boards. Touch the boards only when necessary.
ABB order no.: 3ADV050035P0001
Safety Instructions

5
Mechanical installation
These notes are intended for all who install the thyristor power controller. Handle the unit carefully to avoid
damage and injury.
WARNING!
 DCT880 sizes T4 and T5: The thyristor power controller is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Do not
lift the unit by the front cover. Place units T4 and T5 only on its back.
 Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the thyristor power controller when installing.
Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause damage or lead to malfunction.
 Ensure sufficient cooling.
 Do not fasten the thyristor power controller by riveting or welding.
Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the thyristor power controller or operate the
thyristor power controller. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death and/or damage to the
equipment.
WARNING!
 Before adjusting the thyristor power controller and putting it into service, make sure that all
connected equipment is suitable for operation throughout the voltage/current range provided
by the thyristor power controller.
 Do not control the connected equipment with the disconnecting device (disconnecting
mains); instead, use the control panel keys and , or commands via the I/O board of
the thyristor power controller.
 Mains connection
You can use a disconnect switch (with fuses) to disconnect the electrical components of the
thyristor power controller from the mains for installation and maintenance work. The type of
disconnect switch used must be as per EN 60947-3, Class B, so as to comply with EU
regulations, or a circuit-breaker type which switches off the load circuit by means of an
auxiliary contact causing the breaker's main contacts to open. The mains disconnect must be
locked in its "OPEN" position during any installation and maintenance work.
 EMERGENCY POWER OFF buttons must be installed at each control desk and at all other
control panels requiring an emergency off function. Pressing the Stop button on the control
panel of the thyristor power controller will not cause an emergency off by the thyristor power
controller and it will not disconnect the thyristor power controller from any dangerous
potential.
 To avoid unintentional operating states, or to shut the unit down in case of any imminent
danger according to the standards in the safety instructions it is not sufficient to merely shut
down the thyristor power controller via signals Run or Enable or from control panel or PC
tool.
 Intended use
The operating instructions cannot take into consideration every possible case of
configuration, operation or maintenance. Thus, they mainly give such advice only, which is
required by qualified personnel for normal operation of the machines and devices in industrial
installations.
If in special cases the electrical machines and devices are intended for use in non-industrial
installations - which may require stricter safety regulations (e.g. protection against contact by
children or similar) - these additional safety measures for the installation must be provided by
the customer during assembly.
Note:
 When the control location is not set to Local, the Stop key on the control panel will not stop
the thyristor power controller. To stop the thyristor power controller using the control panel,
press the Loc/Rem key and then the Stop key .
Safety Instructions

6
Table of contents
Safety Instructions 3
Table of contents 6
DCT880 Manuals and Tools 9
List of manuals ............................................................................................................................................... 9
Documentation ............................................................................................................................................. 10
DCT880 Information..................................................................................................................................... 10
Before use 11
Acceptance inspection ................................................................................................................................. 11
Precautions for using thyristor power controllers ......................................................................................... 12
Environmental conditions ............................................................................................................................. 13
Regulatory compliance ............................................................................................................................ 14
Ratings ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
Voltage ratings ......................................................................................................................................... 14
400 V / 525 V units, current and power ratings ....................................................................................... 15
690 V units, current and power ratings .................................................................................................... 15
Installation and wiring 17
Installation .................................................................................................................................................... 17
Before installation .................................................................................................................................... 17
Cabinet installation................................................................................................................................... 17
Dimensions and weights .......................................................................................................................... 18
Fan terminals and cooling air duct sizes.................................................................................................. 23
Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................... 25
Connection and wiring example for thyristor power controllers T1 … T5: ............................................... 25
Removal and attachment of the front cover ............................................................................................. 31
Cabling ..................................................................................................................................................... 31
Power terminals ....................................................................................................................................... 33
Cooling fans ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Control circuit terminals on the SDCS-CON-H ........................................................................................ 38
Control circuit terminal layout .................................................................................................................. 40
XAO: Analog outputs ............................................................................................................................... 41
XD2D: Device-to-device link .................................................................................................................... 42
RO1, RO2, RO3: Relay outputs ............................................................................................................... 42
XDIO: Digital inputs / outputs ................................................................................................................... 43
XDI: Digital inputs .................................................................................................................................... 43
Power interface terminals on the SDCS-PIN-H11 ................................................................................... 47
XAUX: Auxiliary voltage input (X99) ........................................................................................................ 48
XN1: Mains voltage neutral (X54) ............................................................................................................ 48
XEXCT: External current measurement (X65) ........................................................................................ 48
XEXVM: External voltage measurement (X60) ....................................................................................... 49
Interfaces and slots of the SDCS-CON-H.................................................................................................... 50
Accessories .................................................................................................................................................. 51
DPI-H01 kit ............................................................................................................................................... 51
Semiconductor fuses (F1) ........................................................................................................................ 54
Auxiliary transformer (T2) ........................................................................................................................ 58
External measurement of output voltage and output current (CTs) ........................................................ 59
Using the control panel 60
What this chapter contains ...................................................................................................................... 60
Basic operation ............................................................................................................................................ 60
User interface overview ........................................................................................................................... 60
Control panel navigation .............................................................................................................................. 60
Table of contents

7
Navigation memory................................................................................................................................... 60
Home view .................................................................................................................................................... 61
Navigating in the Home view .................................................................................................................... 61
Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Common user tasks...................................................................................................................................... 61
Basic operation of the unit ........................................................................................................................ 61
Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 62
System information and help .................................................................................................................... 62
Faults and warnings ................................................................................................................................. 62
Basic settings and assistants ................................................................................................................... 62
Backups .................................................................................................................................................... 62
Start-up procedure 63
Step 1: Checks prior to power up ................................................................................................................. 64
Step 2: Power ON and check ....................................................................................................................... 64
Step 3: Set basic parameters and control modes ........................................................................................ 66
Step 4 / 5: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and direct coupled loads .................................................... 66
Step 4 / 5: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and direct connected loads................................................ 68
Step 8 / 9: Basic settings for single-phase mains and direct connected loads ........................................ 70
Step 4 / 11: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and loads connected via transformer .............................. 71
Step 4 / 11: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and loads connected via transformer .............................. 74
Step 8 / 14: Basic settings for single-phase mains and loads connected via transformer ....................... 77
Step 16: Setting up the command chain .................................................................................................. 80
Step 17: Setting up the reference chain ................................................................................................... 81
Step 18: Run the operation check ................................................................................................................ 85
Parameters 86
What this chapter contains ....................................................................................................................... 86
Terms and abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 86
Summary of parameter groups ................................................................................................................. 86
Parameter listing........................................................................................................................................... 88
Group 1 Actual Values.............................................................................................................................. 88
Group 3 Input references.......................................................................................................................... 94
Group 4 Warnings and faults .................................................................................................................... 95
Group 5 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................. 97
Group 6 Control and status words............................................................................................................ 97
Group 7 System info ............................................................................................................................... 111
Group 10 Standard DI, RO ..................................................................................................................... 113
Group 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO ............................................................................................................. 119
Group 12 Standard AI............................................................................................................................. 123
Group 13 Standard AO ........................................................................................................................... 128
Group 14 I/O extension module 1 .......................................................................................................... 132
Group 19 Start/Stop Mode...................................................................................................................... 151
Group 21 General References ............................................................................................................... 159
Group 22 Leg 1 Reference Chain .......................................................................................................... 162
Group 23 Leg 1 Control Detailed ............................................................................................................ 166
Group 28 Unit Faults .............................................................................................................................. 174
Group 29 Multitap ................................................................................................................................... 179
Group 30 Leg 1 Limits ............................................................................................................................ 179
Group 31 Leg 2 Limits ............................................................................................................................ 181
Group 32 Leg 3 Limits ............................................................................................................................ 181
Group 33 Maintenance timer & counter ................................................................................................. 181
Group 35 Thermal Measurement ........................................................................................................... 182
Table of contents

8
Group 36 Leg 1 Load monitoring ........................................................................................................... 184

Group 41 Process PID 1 ........................................................................................................................ 189
Group 45 Energy efficiency ................................................................................................................... 202
Group 46 Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 202
Group 47 Data storage .......................................................................................................................... 202
Group 49 Panel port communication ..................................................................................................... 205
Group 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA).......................................................................................................... 206
Group 51 FBA A settings ....................................................................................................................... 211
Group 52 FBA A data in ......................................................................................................................... 213
Group 53 FBA A data out ...................................................................................................................... 213
Group 54 FBA B settings ....................................................................................................................... 214
Group 55 FBA B data in ......................................................................................................................... 214
Group 56 FBA B data out ...................................................................................................................... 214
Group 58 Embedded fieldbus ................................................................................................................ 214
Group 60 DDCS communication ........................................................................................................... 219
Group 61 D2D and DDCS transmit data................................................................................................ 222
Group 62 D2D and DDCS receive data ................................................................................................. 223
Group 95 HW configuration ................................................................................................................... 226
Group 96 System ................................................................................................................................... 229
Group 99 Basic Settings ........................................................................................................................ 233
Troubleshooting warnings and faults 254
Protective functions.................................................................................................................................... 254
Before proceeding with troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 254
Warning- or fault code on the control panel or 7-segment display ............................................................ 255
Numerical list of warning and fault codes .............................................................................................. 255
Possible causes of warnings and faults, checks and measures ........................................................... 270
Appendix 278
Firmware overview diagram ................................................................................................................... 278
Command chain diagram ....................................................................................................................... 279
Diagram of data transfer via F-type fieldbus adapter using FBA and transparent 16 bit profile............ 280
Leg 1 state machine............................................................................................................................... 281
Leg 1 Reference chain diagram............................................................................................................. 284
Master - follower communication (Master)............................................................................................. 293
Master - follower communication (Follower) .......................................................................................... 294
Process PID 1 Setpoint .......................................................................................................................... 295
Process PID 1 Feedback ....................................................................................................................... 296
Process PID 1 Output ............................................................................................................................ 297
Table of contents

9
DCT880 Manuals and Tools

List of manuals
Language
Publication number E D I ES F CN RU
DCT880 Quick Guide 3ADW000435 x p p p p
DCT880 Units
DCT880 Flyer 3ADW000429 x x x x x x x
DCT880 Technical Catalog 3ADW000453 x
DCT880 Manual 3ADW000431 x x
DCT880 Power Optimizer Control Manual 3ADW000441 x
DCT880 Multitap Control Manual 3ADW000440 x
ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual 3AUA0000085685
Option manuals and guides
SDCS-DPI-H01 panel bus adapter module HW DCT880 0001E x
DPMP-01 mounting platform for ACS-AP control 3AUA0000100140 x
panel
DPMP-02 mounting platform for ACS-AP control 3AUA0000136205 x
panel
FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module 3AFE68615500 x
3AUA0000121752 x
FDNA-01 DeviceNet™ adapter module 3AFE68573360 x
FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module 3AUA0000068940 x
3AUA0000083936 x
FENA-01/-11/-21 Ethernet adapter module 3AUA0000093568 x
FEPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module 3AUA0000123527 x
3AUA0000133138 x
FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module 3AFE68573271 x
3AFE68989078 x
FSCA-01 RS-485 adapter module 3AUA0000109533 x
Drive (IEC61131-3) application programming 3AUA0000127808 x
manual
Tool and maintenance manuals and guides
Drive composer PC tool 3AUA0000094606 x
NETA-21 remote monitoring tool 3AUA00000969391 x
NETA-21 remote monitoring tool installation and 3AUA0000096881 x
startup guide
DCT880 Service Manual 3ADW000449 x
x → existing p → planned
Status 10.2015
DCT880 Manuals list e f.docx
Manuals and Tools

10
Documentation
The structure of the documentation is according to the following system:
 The DCT880 Technical Catalog contains information to engineer complete thyristor power controller
systems
 The DCT880 Manual contains information about
1. unit dimensions, electronic boards, fans and auxiliary parts
2. mechanical and electrical installation
3. firmware and parameter settings
4. start-up and maintenance of the entire thyristor power controller
5. faults, warnings and information for trouble shooting
 The DCT880 Service Manual contains information for maintenance and repair of the thyristor power
controller
 Additional information about technical accessories (e.g. hardware extension or fieldbus adapter) are
handled by separate manuals - see table above.
DCT880 Information
All Information on DCT880 is also available on the internet:
 DCT880 documentation
 PC tool (Drive composer entry) for parameterization, commissioning and service
 Drive loader 2.x for firmware download
 DCT880 firmware
Manuals and Tools

11
Before use
Acceptance inspection
Unpacking the unit
Open the box, remove the
shock dampers, separate
manual and accessories.
Attention:
Do not lift the thyristor power
controller by the front cover!
Delivery check
Check that there are no signs of damage. Before attempting installation and operation, check the information
on the nameplate of the thyristor power controller to verify that the unit is of the correct type. The label
includes an IEC rating and CE markings, a type code and a serial number, which allow individual identification
of each unit. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there are no two units with the same
serial number:
Production year 2015 and week 46

❶: Rated power ❸: Rated input voltage for IEC ❼: Mains frequency
❷: Losses ❹: Rated output voltage for IEC ❽: Airflow
❺: Rated input voltage for UL ❾: Short Circuit Current Rating
❻: Rated output voltage for UL ❿: Rated input / output current
Type code
The type code contains information on the specifications and configuration of the thyristor power controller:
The thyristor power controller’s basic type code: DCT880-AAB-CCCC-DDEF

Product family: DCT880
Type: AA = W0 Standard
Power part type: B =2 Two-leg anti-parallel circuit
=3 Three-leg anti-parallel circuit
Unit type: CCCC = Rated AC current (RMS) per leg
Rated AC voltage: DD = 04 110 VAC … 400 VAC
= 05 110 VAC … 525 VAC
= 07 315 VAC … 690 VAC
Power connection: E =X Standard
Revision code: F =0 With SDCS-PIN-H11
=A With SDCS-PIN-H11A
Before use

12
Precautions for using thyristor power controllers

WARNING!
Only a qualified electrician may carry out the work. Follow the Safety instructions on the first
pages of this manual. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the thyristor power controller is disconnected from the mains (input power)
during installation. If the thyristor power controller was already connected to the mains, wait for 5
min. after disconnecting mains power.
Checking the insulation of the assembly

Every thyristor power controller was tested for insulation between the main circuit and the frame (2500 V rms
50 Hz for 1 second) at the factory. Therefore, do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests
(e.g. hi-pot or megger) on any part of the thyristor power controller. Check the insulation of the assembly as
follows.
WARNING!
Check the insulation before connecting the thyristor power controller to the mains. Make sure
that the thyristor power controller is disconnected from the mains (input power).
1. Check that the cables to the connected equipment are disconnected

from the thyristor power controller output phases U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistances of the cables and the connected
equipment between each circuit (U2, V2 and W3) and Protective Earth
(PE) by using a measuring voltage of 1 kV DC. The insulation
resistance must be higher than 1 MΩ.
Supply voltage
Check voltage levels of:
 auxiliary voltage (XAUX on SDCS-PIN-H11)
 cooling fan terminals (T4 and T5)
 mains voltage connected to U1, V1, W1
Connecting the power cables
Check:
 Grounding and screening of power cables see chapter Cabling
 Cross sectional areas and tightening torques of power cable, see chapter Power terminals
WARNING!
The XSTO terminals must not be used for thyristor power controllers.
They are not offering any certified safety functionality.
Before use

13
Environmental conditions
This chapter contains the technical specifications of the thyristor power controller, e.g. the ratings, sizes and
technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other markings and warranty
policy.
System connection Environmental limit values

Voltage, 3-phase: 110 … 690 V acc. to IEC 60038 Permissible cooling air temperature
Voltage deviation: ±10 % continuous; ±15 % short-time With rated AC current (forced
(0.5 … 30 cycles) ventilation): 0 … +40°C
Rated frequency: 50 Hz or 60 Hz With different AC current see
Static frequency deviation: 50 Hz ±2 %; 60 Hz ±2 % figure below: +30 … +55°C
Dynamic frequency range: 50 Hz: ±5 Hz; 60 Hz: ± 5 Hz For options: 0 … +40°C
df/dt: 17 % / s Relative humidity (at +5 … +40°C): 5 … 95 %, no condensation
Degree of protection Relative humidity (at 0 … +5°C): 5 … 50 %, no condensation
Thyristor power controllers Change of the ambient temperature < 0.5°C / minute
and options (fuses, etc.): IP 00 (EN 60529) Storage temperature: -40 … +55°C
Paint finish Transport temperature: -40 … +70°C
Thyristor power controllers: Dark grey RAL 7012 Pollution degree (IEC 60664-1, IEC
Installation category 60439-1, EN 60947-1): 2
Power network: installation category III up to 600 V Vibration class: 3M4
installation category II up to 690 V Site elevation
Cooling fan supply: 230 VAC (T4 … T5) <1000 m above mean sea level: 100 %, no current reduction
Utilization categories >1000 m above mean sea level: current reduction, see figure
AC51: non inductive or slightly inductive below
loads, resistance furnaces Duty cycle: uninterrupted duty / continuous
AC56a: switching of transformers operation
Form designation: form 4
Effect of the site elevation above mean sea level on the thyristor Effect of the ambient temperature on the thyristor power controller’s
power controller’s load capacity: load capacity:
Current reduction to % of Current reduction to % of

nominal thyristor power controller current nominal thyristor power controller current
Effect of site elevation and ambient temperature on the thyristor power controller‘s load capacity
Current reduction to % of nominal thyristor power controller current
Before use

14
Size Sound pressure level Vibration Shock Transport in Short circuit withstand rating
LP (1 m distance) (EN 60068-2-6) (EN 60068-2-29) original Package The DCT880 is suitable for use in a circuit
capable of delivering not more than:
T1 55 dBA 0.5 g, 5 … 55 Hz 7 g / 22 ms 1.2 m 65 kA rms symmetrical ampere at a
T2 55 dBA maximum of 690 VAC
T3 60 dBA 1.0 m
T4 66 ... 70 dBA,
depending on fan
T5 75 dBA 1 mm, 2 ... 9 Hz
0.3 mm, 2 ... 9 Hz
Regulatory compliance
The thyristor power controllers are designed for use in industrial environments. In EEA countries, the
components fulfill the requirements of the EU directives, see table below.
European Union Directive Manufacturer's assurance Harmonized Standards

Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC Declaration of Conformity EN 60947-4-3
EMC Directive
2004/108/EC Declaration of Conformity EN 60947-4-3 class A
(If all installation instructions concerning cable In accordance with
selection, cabling and EMC filters or dedicated 3ADW000032
transformer are followed.)
Ratings
Voltage ratings
Mains voltage Output voltage Voltage
UV1N [VAC] UV2N [VAC] class
110 110 04
230 230 04
380 380 04
400 400 04
415 415 04
440 440 05
460 460 05
480 480 05
500 500 05
525 525 05
575 575 07
600 600 07
660 660 07
690 690 07
Before use

15
400 V / 525 V units, current and power ratings
Size I Pout Pout Ploss W03 Ploss W02 Air flow Auxiliary
[A] (RMS) [kW] ① [kW] ② [kW] [kW] [m3/h] voltage
T1 20 13 17 0.13 0.09 no fan +24 VDC, ±10 %
35 24 30 0.19 0.14
55 38 47 0.29 0.21 360
80 55 69 0.32 0.23
100 69 86 0.41 0.28
125 86 108 0.50 0.34
T2 160 110 138 0.67 0.46
200 138 173 0.69 0.47
245 169 212 0.86 0.58
T3 325 225 281 1.01 0.69
360 249 311 1.14 0.78
420 291 363 1.32 0.90 720
T4 550 381 476 1.84 1.25 925
675 467 584 2.06 1.40
740 512 640 2.29 1.55 1860
T5 890 616 770 3.50 - 800
960 - - - 2.90
① Power ratings for a 3-phase load in star configuration at 400 VAC (e.g. 3  20 A  400 V / 1000 = 13 kW)
② Power ratings for a 3-phase load in star configuration at 500 VAC (e.g. 3  20 A  500 V / 1000 = 17 kW)
690 V units, current and power ratings
Size I Pout Ploss W03 Ploss W02 Air flow Auxiliary

[A] (RMS) [kW] ③ [kW] [kW] [m3/h] voltage
T1 35 42 0.19 0.14 360 +24 VDC, ±10 %
80 95 0.32 0.23
100 120 0.41 0.28
T2 160 191 0.67 0.46
200 - - 0.47
T3 360 430 1.14 0.78
T4 630 753 2.01 1.33 925
T5 890 1064 3.50 - 800
960 - - 2.90
③ Power ratings for a 3-phase load in star configuration at 690 VAC (e.g. 3  35 A  690 V / 1000 = 42 kW)
Before use

16
Current ratings with 50 Hz and 60 Hz supplies see below. The current ratings are based on an ambient
temperature of maximum 40°C and an elevation of maximum 1000 m above mean sea level:
Size I Thyristor power controller Thyristor power controller

[A] (RMS) 400 V / 525 V 690 V
T1 20 DCT880-W0x-0020-04/05 -
35 DCT880-W0x-0035-04/05 DCT880-W0x-0035-07
55 DCT880-W0x-0055-04/05 -
80 DCT880-W0x-0080-04/05 DCT880-W0x-0080-07
100 DCT880-W0x-0100-04/05 DCT880-W0x-0100-07
125 DCT880-W0x-0125-04/05 -
T2 160 DCT880-W0x-0160-04/05 DCT880-W0x-0160-07
200 DCT880-W0x-0200-04/05 DCT880-W02-0200-07
245 DCT880-W0x-0245-04/05 -
T3 325 DCT880-W0x-0325-04/05 -
360 DCT880-W0x-0360-04/05 DCT880-W0x-0360-07
420 DCT880-W0x-0420-04/05 -
T4 550 DCT880-W0x-0550-04/05 -
630 - DCT880-W0x-0630-07
675 DCT880-W0x-0675-04/05 -
740 DCT880-W0x-0740-04/05 -
T5 890 DCT880-W03-0890-04/05 DCT880-W03-0890-07
960 DCT880-W02-0960-04/05 DCT880-W02-0960-07
Note:
Input current = output current
Before use

17
Installation and wiring

Installation
Before installation
Install the thyristor power controller in an upright position with the cooling section facing a wall. Check the
installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter Dimensions for frame details.
Requirements for the installation site
See chapter Environmental conditions for the allowed operation conditions of the thyristor power controller.
Wall
The wall should be as close to vertical as possible, of non-flammable material and strong enough to carry the
weight of the unit. Check that there is nothing on the wall to inhibit the installation.
Floor
The floor or material below the installation must be non-flammable.
Free space around the unit

Around the unit free space is required to enable cooling airflow, service and maintenance see chapter
Dimensions.
Cabinet installation
The required distance between parallel units:
Parallel units Distance

Unit to Unit [mm]
T1 … T4 to T1 …T4 10
T1 … T4 to T5 160
T5 to T5 300
The cooling air entering the unit must not exceed +40°C.
Preventing cooling air recirculation Unit above another

Prevent air recirculation inside and outside the cabinet
Lead the exhaust cooling air away from the unit

above. Distances see chapter Dimensions.
Installing and wiring

18
Dimensions and weights

See the dimensional drawings of the DCT880 below. The dimensions are in millimeters.
Size Thyristor power controller h  w  d [mm] weight [kg]

T1 DCT880-W0x-0020-0x 370  270  215 11
DCT880-W0x-0035-0x
DCT880-W0x-0055-0x
DCT880-W0x-0080-0x
DCT880-W0x-0100-0x
DCT880-W0x-0125-0x

19

T2 DCT880-W0x-0160-0x 370  270  270 16
DCT880-W0x-0200-0x
DCT880-W0x-0245-0x

20

T3 DCT880-W0x-0325-0x 466  270  315 25
DCT880-W0x-0360-0x
DCT880-W0x-0420-0x

21

T4 DCT880-W0x-0550-0x 670  270  352 38
DCT880-W0x-0630-07
DCT880-W0x-0675-0x
DCT880-W0x-0740-0x

22

T5 DCT880-W03-0890-0x 740.5  270  368 60
DCT880-W02-0960-0x

23
Fan terminals and cooling air duct sizes

24

25
Wiring
This chapter contains the instructions that must be followed when selecting cables, protections, cable routing
and way of operation of the thyristor power controller. Always follow local regulations. This chapter applies to
all DCT880 thyristor power controllers.
Attention:
If the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the thyristor power controller may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.
Connection and wiring example for thyristor power controllers T1 … T5:
Basic connection diagram T1 …T3, Basic connection diagram T4 and T5,
3-phase mains, W03 (3 legs): 3-phase mains, W03 (3 legs):

26

3-phase mains, W02 (2 legs): 3-phase mains, W02 (2 legs):

27

phase-to-phase mains, W03 (3 legs): phase-to-phase mains, W03 (3 legs):

28

phase-to-phase mains, W02 (2 legs): phase-to-phase mains, W02 (2 legs):

29

single-phase mains, W03 (3 legs): single-phase mains, W03 (3 legs):

30

single-phase mains, W02 (2 legs): single-phase mains, W02 (2 legs):

31
Removal and attachment of the front cover

To remove the DCT880 front cover depress the locks at the bottom  and lift the front cover up . There is
no need to remove the control panel.
To attach the DCT880 front cover hang it on the top notches and click in the locks at the bottom. There is no
need to remove the control panel.
Cabling
Power cables
Dimension the power cables according to local regulations. The cables must:
1. be able to carry the DCT880 load current
2. be rated for at least 60°C
3. fulfill short-circuit protection
4. be rated according permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions (so that the fault point
voltage will not rise too high when an earth fault occurs)
5. be screened according to safety regulations
Power cable short-circuit protection
Always protect the mains cables with fuses. Size the fuses according to local safety regulations, to appropriate
input voltage and to the rated current of the thyristor power controller, see Environmental conditions.
High-speed semiconductor fuses provide short-circuit protection, but do not provide thermal overload
protection.
Control / signal cables
Used screened cables for digital signals, which are longer than 3 m and for all analog signals. Connect each
screen at both ends by metal clamps or comparable means directly on clean metal surfaces, if both earthing
points belong to the same earth line. Otherwise, connect a capacitor to earth on one end. In the thyristor
power controller cabinet this kind of connection must be made directly on the sheet metal close to the
terminals and if the cable comes from outside also on the PE bar. At the other end of the cable, connect the
screen well with the housing of the signal emitter or receiver.

32
Connection of cable
screens with metal
clamps to the metal
surface of the electronic
tray.
A double shielded twisted pair cable, e.g. JAMAK by NK Cables, Finland, must be used for analog signals and
the pulsed signals. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not use common return for
different analog signals.
A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but single shielded twisted multi
pair cable is also usable.
Double shielded twisted pair cable Single shielded twisted multi pair cable
 Pairs should be twisted as close to terminals as possible

 Run analog and digital signals in separate, screened cables
 Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in the same cables as
digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled signals be run as twisted pairs too.
Attention:
Never run 24 VDC and 115 / 230 VAC signals in the same cable!
Relay cables
Cable types with braided metallic screens (e.g. ÖLFLEX, LAPPKABEL, Germany) has been tested and
approved by ABB.
Control panel cable
The cable connecting the control panel to the DCT880 thyristor power controller must not exceed 3 meters.
The cable type tested and approved by ABB is included in the control panel option kits.
Fieldbus cables
Fieldbus cables can be quite different, depending on the fieldbus type. Please refer to control / signal cables.
Routing the cables
Run the power cables away from other cables. Power cables of several thyristor power controllers can be run
in parallel next to each other. It is recommended that power cables and control cables be installed on separate
trays. Avoid long parallel runs of power cables with other cables in order to reduce electromagnetic
interference caused by rapid changes in the thyristor power controller’s output voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables, make sure they are arranged at an angle close to 90 degrees.
Do not run spare cables through the cabinet.

33
All cable trays must have good electrical connection to each other and to ground. Aluminium tray systems can
be used to improve equalizing of potential.
The following diagrams show the proper routing of cables:
Not allowed unless the 24 VDC Route 24 VDC and 115 /

cable is insulated for 230 VAC 230 VAC control cables in
or insulated with an insulation separate ducts inside the
sleeve for 230 VAC. cabinet.
Power terminals
Cross-sectional areas - Tightening torques
Recommended cross-sectional area according to DINVDE 0276-1000 and DINVDE 0100-540 (PE) in a trefoil
arrangement, up to 50°C ambient temperature. The necessary wire torque at 60°C wire temperature is the
same as recommended in the following tables.
Power cables:
U1, V1, W1 are the input power terminal. U2, V2, W2 are the output power terminal. PE is the terminal for
protective earth.
Size Thyristor power controller U1, V1, W1 / U2, V2, W2 PE

1 (2.)
I
[A~] [mm²] [mm²] [mm²] [Nm]
T1 DCT880-W0x-0020-0x 20 1x4 - 1x 4 1 x M6 6
DCT880-W0x-0035-0x 35 1x6 - 1x 6 1 x M6 6
DCT880-W0x-0055-0x 55 1 x 25 - 1x 16 1 x M6 6
DCT880-W0x-0080-0x 80 1 x 25 - 1x 16 1 x M6 6
DCT880-W0x-0100-0x 100 1 x 35 - 1x 16 1 x M6 6
DCT880-W0x-0125-0x 125 2 x 25 1 x 70 1x 25 1 x M6 6
T2 DCT880-W0x-0160-0x 160 2 x 25 1 x 70 1x 25 1 x M10 25
DCT880-W0x-0200-0x 200 2 x 25 1 x 95 1x 25 1 x M10 25
DCT880-W0x-0245-0x 245 2 x 50 - 1x 50 1 x M10 25
T3 DCT880-W0x-0325-0x 325 2 x 95 - 1x 50 1 x M10 25
DCT880-W0x-0360-0x 360 2 x 95 - 1x 50 1 x M10 25
DCT880-W0x-0420-0x 420 2 x 95 - 1x 50 1 x M10 25
T4 DCT880-W0x-0550-0x 550 2 x 120 - 1x120 1 x M12 50
DCT880-W0x-0630-07 630 2 x 120 - 1x120 1 x M12 50
DCT880-W0x-0675-0x 675 2 x 150 - 1x150 1 x M12 50
DCT880-W0x-0740-0x 740 2 x 150 - 1x150 1 x M12 50
T5 DCT880-W03-0890-0x 890 4 x 95 3 x 120 1x185 2 x M10 25
DCT880-W02-0960-0x 960 4 x 95 3 x 120 1x185 2 x M10 25
You will find instructions on how to calculate the PE conductor’s cross-sectional area in IEC 60364-4-xx or in
equivalent national standards. We would remind you that thyristor power controller might have a current-
limiting effect.
WARNING!
If neutral is connected to the star point of the load, the cable has to be able to carry up to 1.73
(√3) times nominal load current.

34
Power terminal location and layout

T1 T2
T3 T4
T5

35
Terminal covers
Terminal cover according to VBG 4 regulations
For thyristor power controllers size T1 … T4 shrouds for protection against contact are provided.
Ident number Remark

3ADT631137P0001 T1, T2
3ADV400208P0001 T3
3ADV400207P0001 T4
Mount the T1 / T2 cover using the existing lateral pins, than swing it down to snap it into the terminal row.
T3 and T4 mounting is the same, without the snap-in mechanism.
Examples of power terminal covers for T3 (left) and T4 (right) thyristor power controllers.

36
Cooling fans
Fan assignment:
Size Thyristor power controller Configuration Fan type
T1 DCT880-W0x-0020-0x … - No fan, convection cooled
DCT880-W0x-0035-04/05
DCT880-W0x-0035-07 1 2 x 3ADT754041P0001 (internal 24 VDC)
DCT880-W0x-0055-0x …
DCT880-W0x-0125-0x
T2 DCT880-W0x-0160-0x …
DCT880-W0x-0245-0x
T3 DCT880-W0x-0325-0x …
DCT880-W0x-0360-0x
DCT880-W0x-0420-0x 2 4 x 3ADT754041P0001 (internal 24 VDC)
T4 DCT880-W0x-0550-0x … 3 1 x DCA0012171P0001 (230 VAC)
DCT880-W0x-0675-0x
DCT880-W0x-0740-0x 1 x 3ADT754028P0001 (230 VAC)
T5 DCT880-W03-0890-0x … 4 1 x 3ADT754042R0002 (230 VAC)
DCT880-W02-0960-0x
Fan data:
Fan 3ADT754041P0001 DCA0012171P0001 3ADT754028P0001 3ADT754042R0002
Rated voltage [VAC] 24 VDC ① 230; 1~ 230; 1~ 230; 1~
Tolerance [%] +15 / -50 +6 / -10 +6 / -10 ± 10
Frequency [Hz] - 50 60 50 60 50 60
Power consumption [W] 8.16 64 80 135 185 227 390
Current consumption [A] 0.34 0.29 0.35 0.59 0.82 1.1 1.7
Blocking current [A] - < 0.7 < 0.8 < 0.9 < 0.9 3.1 3.1
Air flow [m3/h] freely blowing 180 925 1030 1860 1975 - -
Air flow [m3/h] @ working point - - - 800; 1.0 A 850; 1.6 A
Maximum ambient temperature < 70 < 70 < 60 < 55
[°C]
Useful lifetime of grease Approximately Approximately Approximately
70,000 h / 25°C 40,000 h / 60°C 40,000 h / 40°C
Protection DC ② Internal temperature detector
① Internally connected
② Increased losses due to increased current with a blocked rotor will not result in a winding temperature, higher than
permissible for the insulation class being involved.

37
Fan connection:

38
Control circuit terminals on the SDCS-CON-H

The control circuit terminals are common for all sizes T1 … T5.
Location of the control circuit board SDCS-CON-H
The SDCS-CON-H is mounted on an electronic tray. The electronic tray is attached in the housing by means
of two hinges.
Watchdog function
The SDCS-CON-H has an internal watchdog. The watchdog controls the proper function of the SDCS-CON-H
and the firmware. If the watchdog trips, it has the following effects:
 the thyristor firing control is reset and disabled
 all DI’s will not be processed
 all DO’s are frozen in the actual state
 all AI’s will not be processed
 all programmable AO’s are frozen in the actual state
Recommended wire size - Tightening torques
Control cables:
Wire sizes: Tightening torques:
0.5 … 2.5 mm2 (24 … 12 AWG) 0.5 Nm (5 lbf·in) for both stranded and solid wiring
Control circuit terminal location

39
Intermediate cover

40
Control circuit terminal layout

Internal 24 VDC used External 24 VDC used

41
XAI: Reference voltages and analog inputs

+VREF +10 VDC, ±1 %
RL = 1 … 10 k
Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
-VREF -10 VDC, ±1 %
RL = 1 … 10 k
AI1+ ±10 V [Rin ≥ 200 k], 0 (4) ... 20 mA or ±20 mA [Rin = 100 ] depending on J1
AI1- Change of setting requires reboot of the unit
Differential inputs, common mode range ±30 V
Sampling interval per channel: 0.25 ms
Hardware filter: 0.25 ms
Resolution: 11 bit + sign
Inaccuracy: 1 % of full scale range
AI2+ ±10 V [Rin ≥ 200 k], 0 (4) ... 20 mA or ±20 mA [Rin = 100 ] depending on J2
AI2- Change of setting requires reboot of the unit
AI3+ ±10 V [Rin ≥ 200 k]
AI3- Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
Parameter settings see Group 12 Standard AI
XAO: Analog outputs

AO1 ±10 V [load current ≤ 10 mA] or 0 (4) ... 20 mA [RL ≤ 500 ] depending on J5
Change of setting requires reboot of the unit
Frequency range: 0 … 300 Hz
AO2 ±10 V [load current ≤ 10 mA]
Frequency range: 0 … 300 Hz
IACT Not in use for DCT880
Parameter settings see Group 13 Standard AO

42
XD2D: Device-to-device link

B Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
A Physical layer: RS-485
Termination by switch J3
Parameter settings see Group 60 DDCS communication
The device-to-device link is a daisy-chained RS-485 transmission line that allows basic master-follower
communication with one master and multiple followers. It is also used for the power optimizer.
Set the termination switches J3 (see Jumpers and switches) next to terminal block XD2D to terminated ( )
at the two physical ends of the device-to-device link. All intermediate switches have to be set to not terminated
( ).
Use double shielded twisted-pair cable ( 100 , for example, PROFIBUS compatible cable) for the wiring.
For best immunity, high quality cable is recommended. Keep the cable as short as possible. The maximum
complete length of the link is 50 meters. Avoid unnecessary loops and running the link near power cables.
The following diagram shows the wiring of the device-to-device link.
RO1, RO2, RO3: Relay outputs

NC 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
COM Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
NO Varistor protected
Parameter settings see Group 10 Standard DI, RO
XD24: Digital interlock
DIL The digital interlock works like a normal digital input and has no special function in the DCT880.
It can be selected for example as the source for an emergency stop command or any other
external event.
See the firmware part of this document for more information
+24 VDC logic levels: low < 5 VDC, high > 15 VDC
Rin = 2 k
Digital filter up to 8 ms
+24VD +24 VDC, 200 mA
Total load power of these outputs is 4.8 W (200 mA, 24 VDC) minus the power taken by DIO1
and DIO2

43
XDIO: Digital inputs / outputs

DIO1 Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
DIO2 As input:
+24 VDC logic levels: low < 5 VDC, high > 15 VDC
Rin = 2 k
Filter: 0.25 ms
As output:
Total output current from +24VD is limited to 200 mA
Filter: 0.04 ms
Parameter settings see Group 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO
XDI: Digital inputs
DI1 Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
DI2 +24 VDC logic levels: low < 5 VDC, high > 15 VDC
DI3 Rin = 2 k
DI4 Hardware filter: 0.04 ms
DI5 Digital filter up to 8 ms
DI6
XENC: Encoder
A+ Not in use for DCT880
…
+VENC
XTAC: Analog tacho
AITACH+ Not in use for DCT880
AITACH-
XSMC: Mains contactor
MCCOM 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
MCNO Maximum wire size 2.5 mm2
Varistor protected
STOCOM Not in use for DCT880
STONO
Mains contactor ON command:
E.g. 06.14 Leg 1 Status Word bit 11 = high.
XSTO: Safe torque off
OUT1 For the thyristor power controller to start, both connections (OUT1 to IN1 and IN2) must be
IN1 closed. By default, the terminal block has wires to close the circuit. Removing the wires will
IN2 block the firing pulses.
Current consumption per channel: 55 mA (continuous)

44
X205 Memory unit connection

The thyristor power controller is equipped with a memory unit that is plugged into X201 on the SDCS-CON-H.
The memory unit contains the firmware, the parameters and the application program (as option). It is possible
to handle the parameters by control panel, PC tool or overriding control. Changed parameters are stored
immediately in the memory unit.
In addition, the fault logger entries are stored in the memory unit during de-energizing the auxiliary power.
When a thyristor power controller is replaced, the parameter settings can be retained by transferring the
memory unit from the defective thyristor power controller to the new thyristor power controller.
WARNING!
Do not remove or insert a memory unit when the thyristor power controller is powered.
After power-up, the thyristor power controller will scan the memory unit. If different parameter settings are
detected, they are copied to the thyristor power controller. This may take several minutes.
Replacing the memory unit
Unscrew the memory unit and pull it out. Replace the memory unit in reverse order.
Additional terminals
 Use connectors Slot1 … Slot3 for F-type I/O extension modules and F-type fieldbus adapters
 Connectors XC12, XS13, X14 and X38 connect the SDCS-CON-H to the SDCS-PIN-H for voltage, current,
temperature measurement and safety. Additionally the firing pulses are sent to the thyristors via the
SDCS-PIN-H.
 Use connector X13 to connect the control panel either directly via a jack plug or via a CAT 1:1 cable
(< 3 m) with RJ-45 plugs.

45
Ground isolation diagram
Switch J6 settings:
The ground (DICOM) of digital inputs DI1
… DI5 and DIL is separated from the
ground (DIOGND) of digital inputs / outputs
DIO1, DIO2 and DI6.
The insulation voltage between them is
50 V.
All digital inputs and outputs share the

same ground, default

46
Jumpers and switches

Jumper / switch Description Positions
J1 (AI1) Determines whether analog input AI1 is used as a Current (I)
current or voltage input
Voltage (U), default
J2 (AI2) Determines whether analog input AI2 is used as a Current (I)

current or voltage input
Voltage (U), default
J3 Device-to-device link termination. Must be set to Bus is not terminated,

terminated position when the thyristor power default
controller is the last unit on the link Bus is terminated
J4 Not in use for DCT880 n/a n/a
J5 Determines whether analog output AO1 is used as Voltage (U), default
a current or voltage output
Current (I)
J6 Digital ground selection switch. Determines whether DIOGND and DICOM

DICOM is separated from DIOGND (e.g. the separated
common reference for digital inputs floats). See DIOGND and DICOM
Ground isolation diagram. connected, default
The insulation voltage between them is 50 V.

47
Power interface terminals on the SDCS-PIN-H11

The power interface terminals are common for all sizes T1 … T5.
Location of the power interface board SDCS-PIN-H
The SDCS-PIN-H is located between the power part and the control board SDCS-CON-H.
Recommended wire size - Tightening torques
Power interface cables:
Wire sizes: Tightening torques:
0.5 … 2.5 mm2 (24 … 12 AWG) 0.5 Nm (5 lbf·in) for both stranded and solid wiring
Power interface circuit terminal location
Fuses F100 … F102:

KTK 25 = 25 A

48
Power interface circuit terminal layout
XAUX: Auxiliary voltage input (X99)

+24VI Auxiliary voltage +24 VDC, 2.5 A,
Exception: DCT880-W0x-0420  3 A
Tolerance ±10 %
Power consumption Maximum 72 W
Auxiliary voltage buffering > 150 ms
Power fail < 21.2 VDC; recovery at 21.9 VDC (0.7 V hysteresis)
Additional information Auxiliary power supply for the control unit
XN1: Mains voltage neutral (X54)
UN1 Neutral of mains
XN1:1 and XN1:2 are internally connected
Cable insulation must withstand 525 VAC
XEXCT: External current measurement (X65)
IU2 External current measurement (CT) for phase U2
External adapter board required
IV2 External current measurement (CT) for phase V2
IW2 External current measurement (CT) for phase W2
Activation see 99.70 Current Measurement Configuration

49
XEXVM: External voltage measurement (X60)

UU2 External voltage measurement for phase U2
UV2 External voltage measurement for phase V2
UW2 External voltage measurement for phase W2
UN2 Neutral of load (N2)
Activation see 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration
Functions
The thyristor power controller provides an adjusted setting for current-, voltage measurement and burden
resistors.
The SDCS-PIN-H provides:
 the power supply for all small voltages of the whole thyristor power controller and the connected options
(see XAUX)
 an internal +24 VDC power supply for the cooling fans of unit sizes T1 … T3 (see X41 … X44)
 an internal high ohmic measurement of mains- and output voltages (see X51 … X53 and X55 … X57)
 an interface for external high ohmic measurement of the output voltages (see terminal block XEXVM)
 an interface for internal current transformers measuring the output current (see X3 … X5)
 an interface for external current transformers measuring the output current (see terminal block XEXCT)
 an interface for the heatsink temperature measurement with a PTC resistor (see X22)
 a snubber circuit for thyristor protection together with the snubber resistor mounted on the heatsink (see
X30 and X31)
 the fuses protect the electronic against problems with the mains- or the output voltage (see F100 … F102)
 the control of the thyristor power controller (firing pulses)
 the firing pulse transformers for the power part with 2 or 3 thyristor modules are located on the electronic
board (see T11 … T16)
Jumpers
Jumper Description Positions
S1 (U2) Activates external current Internal current measurement (CT) active,
measurement (CT) for phase U2 default
External current measurement (CT) active
S2 (V2) Activates external current Internal current measurement (CT) active,

measurement (CT) for phase V2 default
S3 (W2) Activates external current Internal current measurement (CT) active,

measurement (CT) for phase W2 default

50
Interfaces and slots of the SDCS-CON-H

Location of interfaces and F-type extension modules
Tighten the screws to secure the F-type extension modules.
Slot1:
For all F-type extension
modules
X13:
Control panel
X205:
Memory unit
Slot2:
modules (recommended
for all fieldbus adapters)
X200:
DCSLink Slot3:
modules

51
Accessories
DPI-H01 kit
Daisy chain adapters are used to connect several thyristor power controllers to one control panel or to a PC
via a control panel. Maximum of 32 nodes are possible. The control panel / PC is the master, while the
thyristor power controllers equipped with a daisy chain adapter are followers.
Note:
The DPI-H01 kit can be ordered together with the thyristor power controller using pluscode +J428.
Contents of the kit
① Plastic cover.
② SDCS-DPI-H adapter.
③ Patch cable.
④ Grounding cable plus screw.
⑤ Stand offs.
Layout
① Clip to attach the plastic cover.
② Status LEDs via light pipes.
③ X13 for the patch cable to the unit.
④ Termination switch (S100).
⑤ Bias switch (S101).
⑥ X1 for grounding.
⑦ X10-1 (IN / PANEL) for control panel.
⑧ X10-2 (OUT) for the next unit.
⑨ Status LEDs:
Name Color Description

POWER Green The unit is powered.
FAULT Red The unit has an active
fault.

52
Installation
1. Inset the four stand offs into the intermediate
cover.
2. Connect the patch cable between X13 on the
SDCS-CON-H and X13 on the SDCS-DPI-H
adapter.
3. Plug the SDCS-DPI-H adapter onto the standoffs.
4. Connect the grounding cable at X1 and the
grounding standoff using the screw.
5. Connect the cables to the control panel / a
thyristor power controller using X10-2 and X10-1.
6. Attach the plastic cover. 7. Attach the front cover.
Chaining a control panel

This figure shows how to chain a control panel to several units:

53
Chaining a PC via a control panel

This figure shows how to chain a PC via a control panel to several units.
Note: When a control panel is used for a PC connection, it cannot be used to operate the units.
Setting up the firmware

1. Power up the unit.
2. Set the node ID, see 49.01 Node ID number. All devices connected to the panel bus must have a unique
node ID. It is advisable to reserve node ID 1 for spare / replacement units, because they have node ID 1 as
the default setting.
3. Set the baud rate, see 49.03 Baud rate. The baud rate has to be the same for all nodes on the panel bus.
4. Select a suitable communication loss action, see 49.04 Communication loss time and 49.05
Communication loss action.
5. Save the settings with 49.06 Refresh settings = Refresh.
Note:
Refreshing may cause a communication break, thus reconnecting the unit may be required.

54
Semiconductor fuses (F1)

Aspects of fusing for the thyristor power controller.
Thyristor power controller configuration
Fuses are required in all cases to protect against further damage. In some configurations, this will entail the
following questions:
1. Where to place the fuse?
2. In the event of what faults will the fuses provide protection against damage?
The figure shows the arrangement of external line

fuses for thyristor power controllers size T1 … T4.
External line fuses can be used for all T1 … T4 units
with a mains voltage up to 690 VAC
The figure shows the arrangement of internal branch

fuses for thyristor power controllers size T5.
Internal branch fuses are standard for all T5 with a
mains voltage up to 690 VAC.
The figure shows the arrangement of internal line

fuses in thyristor power controllers size T1 … T4.
Optional internal line fuses are available for all
T1 … T4 units with a mains voltage up to 525 VAC.
For higher mains voltage up to 690 VAC external line
fuses have to be used.
Conclusion
Never use standard fusing instead of semiconductor fusing in order to save money on the installation. In the
event of a fault condition, the small amount of money saved can cause the semiconductors or other devices to
explode and cause fires. Adequate protection against short circuit and earth fault, as depicted in the EN50178
standard, is possible only with appropriate semiconductor fuses.
External semiconductor fuses and fuse holders
Thyristor power controllers require either external or internal semiconductor fuses.
External line fuses can be used for all T1 … T4 units with a mains voltage up to 690 VAC.
The fourth column of the tables below assigns the semiconductor fuses to the thyristor power controller.
Note:
External line fuses and fuse holders have to be ordered in addition to the thyristor power controller.

55
400 V / 525 V units (external line fuses)

Size Thyristor power Maximum allowed I2t External line fuses
controller value Fuse type Fuse holder Fuse
400 V / 525 V at rated voltage [A2s] size
T1 DCT880-W0x-0020-04/05 1,050 50 A 690V UR OFAX 00 S3L DIN 000
DCT880-W0x-0035-04/05 Type T
DCT880-W0x-0055-04/05 80 A 690V UR OFAX 1 S3 DIN 1*
DCT880-W0x-0080-04/05 5,000 125 A 690V UR
DCT880-W0x-0100-04/05 11,000 160 A 690V UR
DCT880-W0x-0125-04/05 20,000 200 A 690V UR
T2 DCT880-W0x-0160-04/05 250 A 690V UR OFAX 2 S3
DCT880-W0x-0200-04/05 137,000 315 A 690V UR
DCT880-W0x-0245-04/05 245,000 350 A 690V UR
T3 DCT880-W0x-0325-04/05 450 A 690V UR OFAX 3 S3 DIN 2
DCT880-W0x-0360-04/05 320,000 500 A 690V UR
DCT880-W0x-0420-04/05 630 A 690V UR
T4 DCT880-W0x-0550-04/05 781,000 800 A 690V UR 3  170H3006 DIN 3
DCT880-W0x-0675-04/05 980,000 900 A 690V UR
DCT880-W0x-0740-04/05 1000 A 690V
UR
690 V units (external line fuses)
Size Thyristor power Maximum allowed I2t External line fuses
controller value Fuse type Fuse holder Fuse
690 V at rated voltage [A2s] size
T1 DCT880-W0x-0035-07 1,050 50 A 690V UR OFAX 00 S3L DIN 000
Type T
DCT880-W0x-0080-07 5,000 125 A 690V UR OFAX 1 S3 DIN 1*
DCT880-W0x-0100-07 11,000 160 A 690V UR
T2 DCT880-W0x-0160-07 20,000 250 A 690V UR OFAX 2 S3
DCT880-W02-0200-07 137,000 315 A 690V UR
T3 DCT880-W0x-0360-07 320,000 500 A 690V UR OFAX 3 S3 DIN 2
T4 DCT880-W0x-0630-07 980,000 900 A 690V UR 3  170H3006 DIN 3
Dimensions of external line fuses
Size DIN 000 Type T [mm]

56
Size DIN 1* and DIN 2 [mm]

Size A B D E F H
1* 69 135 58 45 40 20
2 69 150 71 55 48 26
Size DIN 3 [mm]

Size A B C D E H
3 51 139 108 90 76 30
Dimensions of fuse holders

OFAX xx xxx
Fuse holder h  w  d [mm] Protection
OFAX 00 S3L 148  112  111 IP20
OFAX 1 S3 250  174  123 IP20
OFAX 2 S3 250  214  133 IP20
OFAX 3 S3 265  246  160 IP20

57
170H3006 (IP00)
Internal semiconductor fuses (option for T1 … T4)

Optional internal line fuses are available for all T1 … T4 with a mains voltage up to 525 VAC.
The fourth column of the table below assigns the semiconductor fuses to the thyristor power controller.
Note:
Internal line fuses for sizes T1 … T4 can be ordered together with the thyristor power controller using
pluscode +S500.
400 V / 525 V units (internal line fuses)
Size Thyristor power controller Maximum allowed I2t value Internal line fuses
400 V / 525 V at rated voltage [A2s] Fuse type Fuse per leg
T1 DCT880-W0x-0020-04/05+S500 1,050 63 A 690V UR 1
DCT880-W0x-0035-04/05+S500
DCT880-W0x-0055-04/05+S500 71 A 690 V UR
DCT880-W0x-0080-04/05+S500 5,000 100 A 690 V UR
DCT880-W0x-0100-04/05+S500 11,000 71 A 690 V UR 2
DCT880-W0x-0125-04/05+S500 20,000 100 A 690 V UR
T2 DCT880-W0x-0160-04/05+S500 200 A 690 V UR 1
DCT880-W0x-0200-04/05+S500 137,000 315 A 690 V UR
DCT880-W0x-0245-04/05+S500 245,000
T3 DCT880-W0x-0325-04/05+S500 450 A 690 V UR
DCT880-W0x-0360-04/05+S500 320,000
DCT880-W0x-0420-04/05+S500 630 A 690 V UR
T4 DCT880-W0x-0550-04/05+S500 781,000 800 A 690 V UR
DCT880-W0x-0675-04/05+S500 980,000 1000 A 690 V UR
DCT880-W0x-0740-04/05+S500 1100A 690V UR
Internal semiconductor fuses (standard for T5)
Internal branch fuses are standard for all T5 units with a mains voltage up to 690 VAC.
The fourth column of the table below assigns the semiconductor fuses to the thyristor power controller.
400 V / 525 V / 690 V units (internal branch fuses)
Size Thyristor power controller Maximum allowed I2t value Internal branch fuses
600 V at rated voltage [A2s] Fuse type Fuse per leg
T5 DCT880-W03-0890-04/05/07 670,000 per fuse 900 A 690 V UR 2
DCT880-W02-0960-0x4/05/07

58
Auxiliary transformer (T2)

Auxiliary transformer (T2) for the +24 VDC power supply and fans
The unit requires various auxiliary voltages, e.g. the unit’s electronics needs +24 VDC and some cooling fans
requires either a single-phase supply of 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The auxiliary transformer (T2) is designed to
supply the +24 VDC power supply for the unit’s electronics and the cooling fans.
Input voltage: 230 / 380 … 690 VAC, ±10 %, single-phase

Input frequency: 50 … 60 Hz
Output voltage: 115 / 230 VAC single-phase
Transformer Power Weight Power Fuse Secondary

(T2) [VA] [kg] losses [W] F2 [A] current [A]
T2 1400 15 100 16 6 @ 230 V
12 @ 115 V
Commissioning hint:
T2 is designed to work as a 230 VAC to 230 VAC isolation transformer to
open or avoid ground loops. Connect the 230 VAC at the 380 VAC and
600 VAC taping according to the drawing on the left hand side.

59
External measurement of output voltage and output current (CTs)

Voltage and current measurement is used to supervise the load. This includes among other things:
 Monitoring the load
 Resistance calculation of the load
 Aging of the load
 Fault detection e.g. overload
 Detection of circulating currents in the transformer e.g. in multitap configurations
The decision to use external voltage and current measurement depends on the type of load. The load types
can be generally divided into loads with and loads without transformers.
1. Loads without transformers do not need external measurement devices. The output current of each leg is
measured by means of internal CT’s. The output voltage is calculated using the measured mains voltage,
the firing angel alpha, the measured output current and the known load configuration.
2. Loads with transformers need external measurement devices, in case accurate load monitoring on the
secondary side of the transformer is desired.
Please note:
For power calculation, external measurement devices are not needed since the power on the primary side and
secondary of a transformer is the same. Except of course for power loss calculation of the transformer itself.

60
Using the control panel

For detailed information, refer to the user’s manual ACS-AP-x Assistant control panel (3AUA0000085685).
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes the basic operations and components of the user interface, lists common user tasks
and gives short instructions on how to complete them.
Basic operation
User interface overview
The user interface has the following main components:
 The Home view (see next page) through which you can monitor signals.
 The main Menu through which you can access most functions of the control panel.
 The Options menu through which you can set a reference, select the unit, edit Home view pages and see
the fault and warning status.
 The Help view (see next page) which provides advice in many situations.
 Faults and warnings view which appear when the unit or the control panel experiences an error.
Control panel navigation

Use the arrow keys and soft keys ( and ) for navigation. Follow the choices on the screen.
Navigation memory
The control panel has a navigation memory that allows you to backtrack your steps through the user interface
with the arrow keys and . The path you have last accessed remains in the memory for 10 minutes.
 The left arrow key ( ) moves you backwards in the menu structure. If you press repeatedly, you return to
the Home view.
 The right arrow key ( ) moves you forward in the menu structure. If you press repeatedly, you move
forward along the path in the menu structure you had previously accessed.

61
Home view
The main view of the control panel is called the Home view. In the Home view, you can monitor the status of
the unit and values, such as current, voltage or power. The Home view has one or more pages, each of which
can display up to three signals.
The number of pages and the signals shown on each page are customizable, and the Home view
configuration is saved to the unit whenever you change it. The maximum total number of signals displayed
varies from 9 … 21, depending on the unit. In the example below, three Home view pages are used, showing
different display formats.
Each application macro and user set has a default Home view. When you select an application macro or
restore a user set, the Home view changes accordingly. There is a default Home view in each unit, which can
be restored in the Settings menu (see the control panel user’s manual).
The Home view opens automatically when you power up the unit. The Home view is also displayed from the
Options menu or the main Menu if no key is pressed for 10 minutes.
Hint:
You can return to the Home view from any view except special screens by holding down the left soft key .
Navigating in the Home view
 Use and to move between the different pages of the Home view. The page numbers are shown
while you scroll between pages.
 Use or to adjust the reference (visible in the top right corner). See the control panel user’s manual.
 Press (Menu) to open the main Menu (see the control panel user’s manual).
 Press (Options) to open the Options menu (see the control panel user’s manual).
Help
You can open a context-sensitive help page in all menus and views by pressing . The help page provides
information on the use of the current view or menu, or on possible problems associated with it.
On the help page, you can:
Press again or (Exit) to exit.
Common user tasks

This following tables list common user tasks and describes how to complete them.
Basic operation of the unit
Task Actions
Start and stop the unit. In local control, press to start the unit and to stop the
unit.
Set the reference (for example, power) in In local control, go to Options > Reference. Set the reference
the Home view. with the arrow keys. For detailed instructions, see the control
panel user’s manual
Switch between local and remote control. Press .

62
Parameters
Task Actions
Choose parameters displayed on the Go to Menu > Parameters > Favorites > Edit. See also the
Favorites list. control panel user’s manual.
View / Edit parameters. Go to Menu > Parameters to view parameters. See also the
control panel user’s manual.
Add parameters to the Home view. See Editing the contents of the Home view in the control panel
user’s manual.
Show / Hide parameter numbers. Press + .
Restore parameter default value. In the editing mode, press + .
To save the default value, press (Save).
View parameters that differ from default Go to Menu > Parameters > Modified.
value.
System information and help
Task Actions
How to get help.
Press to open the context-sensitive help.
View control panel version. Go to Menu > System info > Control panel.
View unit information. Go to Menu > System info > Drive.
Faults and warnings
See chapter Troubleshooting for detailed information.
Task Actions
Hide / View an active fault. Faults are automatically displayed. If you hide a fault by
pressing (Hide), it automatically reappears after 60
seconds of no key presses.
You can also view the fault through Options > Fault status.
Open help page on a fault.
Press to view the help page.
Reset an active fault. Press (Reset) to reset an active fault.
View faults. Go to Menu > Event log > Active faults.
Hide / View an active warning. Warnings are automatically displayed. If you hide a warning by
pressing (Hide), it automatically reappears if the warning is
still active after 60 seconds of no key presses.
Open help page on a warning.
Press (How to fix) or to view the help page.
Reset an active warning. Warnings disappear automatically once the condition that has
triggered it goes away.
View past warnings and faults. Go to Menu > Event log > Other events.
Basic settings and assistants
Task Actions
Adjust backlight brightness. Press + or .
Adjust display contrast. Press + or .
Change language. Go to Menu > Settings > Language.
Change time and date, and related Go to Menu > Settings > Date & time.
settings.
Launch an assistant. Go to Menu > Assistants and select an assistant to launch.
Backups
Task Actions
Create a backup. See control panel user’s manual.
Restore a backup. See control panel user’s manual.

63
Start-up procedure
Start-up according to the flow chart below:
Start
Step 1:
Checks prior to power up
Step 2:
Power on and check
Step 3:
Set basic parameters and
control modes
Step 8:
Step 4:
Single-phase
3-phase mains
mains
Step 11: Step 14:

Step 5: Step 9:
Connected via Connected via
Direct connected Direct connected
transformer transformer
Step 6: Step 7: Step 12: Step 13: Step 10: Step 15:
Common Individually Common Individually Individually Individually
controlled controlled controlled controlled controlled controlled
Step 16:
Setting up the command
chain
Step 17:
Setting up the reference
chain
Step 18:
Run the operation check
End
Start-up procedure

64
Step 1: Checks prior to power up

Check the following before power up of the thyristor power controller:
1. Check the wiring to the input terminals (U1, V1, W1) and output terminals (U2, V2, W2).
2. Check that the grounding wires are connected to ground (PE).
WARNING!
Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the power controller to the ground electrodes.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
3. Check the wiring to the auxiliary voltage supply (24 VDC at XAUX) and the fan supply, if applicable.
4. Check the wiring to the external voltage and current measurement connected to XEXCT: 1 / 3 / 5 / 7 and
XEXVM: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 if used.
5. Check the wiring from XN1: 1 to neutral for single-phase + neutral or 3 x single-phase + neutral
configurations.
Single-phase + neutral 3 x single-phase + neutral
6. Check the auxiliary circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuit or ground faults.
7. Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws.
8. Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the power controller are turned OFF. Power on the
power controller with any of those switches being ON may cause unexpected behavior at load side.
Step 2: Power ON and check

WARNING!
Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power on. Do not remove the cover when the
power controller is on.
Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Otherwise, an electric shock could occur.
Turn the auxiliary power on and check the following:

1. Make sure all parameters are at factory settings (default).
2. Check that the control panel displays no fault and set date and time.
3. Check that the used analog inputs work properly:
See 12.11 AI1 actual value, 12.21 AI2 actual value and 12.31 AI3 actual value.
Set AI1 and AI2 from voltage to current if needed (12.15 AI1 unit selection and 12.25 AI2 unit selection).
AI3 is voltage only.
4. Check that the used digital inputs work properly:
See 10.01 DI status.
Start-up procedure

65
5. Set 99.01 Supply Voltage depending on the supply configuration:
99.04 Supply Configuration: 99.01 Supply Voltage:

0: 3ph UVW Phase-to-phase voltage (UL1L2, UL1L3, UL2L3).
1: 3ph UW Eco
2: 3 x 1ph + N Phase voltage (UL1N).
3: 1ph + N
Multitap - See separate manual.

Scott transformer -
6. Turn on the mains and check the following:

In case of 3-phase mains, check the phase-to-phase voltages using 01.07 Voltage U1 - V1 actual, 01.08
Voltage V1 - W1 actual, 01.09 Voltage W1 - U1 actual.
In case of single-phase mains, check the voltage between phase and neutral using 01.01 Voltage U1 - N
actual, 01.02 Voltage V1 - N actual, 01.03 Voltage W1 - N actual.
Start-up procedure

66
Step 3: Set basic parameters and control modes

Please search for your configuration in following tables and start-up the power controller accordingly.
Step 4 / 5: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and direct coupled loads
There is no transformer between the unit’s output and the load.
Step 6: Common controlled loads, leg 2 and leg 3 follow leg 1
99.04 Supply Configuration
U1 V1 W1
99.10 =
Alpha
control α
or
full wave
(burst)
Current Leg 1
IL1
Current Leg 2
IL2
Current Leg 3
IL3
U2 V2 W2
99.05 Load Configuration
Parameter Parameter description / setting

99.01 Supply Voltage Rated supply voltage.
99.02 Load current Rated load current.
99.03 Load Voltage Rated load voltage.
99.04 Supply Configuration Describes the configuration at the input (U1, V1, W1) of the unit.
For detailed description, see group 99.
0: 3ph UVW E.g. for units with 3 legs (W03).
1: 3ph UW eco E.g. for units with 2 legs (W02).
Start-up procedure

67
99.05 Load Configuration Describes the configuration at the output of the unit.
0: 3ph star (3S) The load is connected in a star configuration.

Set 99.03 Load Voltage to the connected
phase-to-phase voltage (e.g. U2 … V2).
1: 3ph star + N (4S) The load is connected in star configuration

with neutral connected to the star point.
Set 99.03 Load Voltage to the connected
phase voltage (e.g. U2 … N).
2: 3ph delta (3D) The load is connected in a delta

configuration.
3: 3ph open delta UV (6D) The load is connected in an open delta

configuration (clockwise phase connection U
V W).
4: 3ph open delta UW (6D) The load is connected in an open delta

configuration (anti-clockwise phase
connection U W V).
99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode Selection of control mode for leg 1. Default input for the reference is AI1 see
Appendix Leg 1.
2 Full wave fix cycle; full wave (burst) with fix cycle control. The load
power depends on 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref and 99.11 Leg 1 Cycle
Time.
3 Full wave variable cycle; full wave (burst) with variable cycle
control. The load power depends on 23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle
Variable Burst and 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
5 U  open loop control; phase angle control.
6 U²  open loop control; phase angle control.
7 I  control; phase angle control.
Start-up procedure

68
8 I²  control; phase angle control.

9 U  control; phase angle control.
10 U²  control; phase angle control.
11 P  control; phase angle control.
12 Leg 1 External Ref 23.65; phase angle control.
99.25 Leg 2 Control Mode Selection of control mode for leg 2.
13 Follow Leg 1; use the same control mode as leg 1.
Step 4 / 5: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and direct connected loads
Step 7: Individual controlled loads, leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3 are independent
U1 V1 W1
99.10 =
Alpha
control αU1
or
full wave αV1
(burst)
αW1
Current Leg 1
IL1
Current Leg 2
IL2
Current Leg 3
IL3
U2 V2 W2

99.01 Supply Voltage … 99.04 Supply Configuration see above.
1: 3ph star + N (4S) The load is connected in star configuration

with neutral connected to the star point.
Start-up procedure

69
3: 3ph open delta UV (6D) The load is connected in an open delta

configuration (clockwise phase connection U V
W).
4: 3ph open delta UW (6D) The load is connected in an open delta

configuration (anti-clockwise phase connection
U W V).
Appendix Leg 1.
Time.
3 Full wave variable cycle; full wave (burst) with variable cycle control.
The load power depends on 23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle Variable
Burst and 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
Appendix Leg 2.
See selection of 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode.
Appendix Leg 3.
Start-up procedure

70
Step 8 / 9: Basic settings for single-phase mains and direct connected loads
Step 10: Individual controlled loads, leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3 are independent
U1 V1 W1
99.10 =
Alpha
control αU1
or
full wave αV1
(burst)
αW1
Current Leg 1
IL1
Current Leg 2
IL2
Current Leg 3
IL3
U2 V2 W2

2: 3 x 1ph + N For units with 3 legs (W03) or 2 legs (W02) connected to

single-phase mains.
9: 3 x 1ph loads The loads are connected as single-phase loads to

neutral.
Appendix Leg 1.
Start-up procedure

71
Time.
3 Full wave variable cycle; full wave (burst) with variable cycle
control. The load power depends on 23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle
Variable Burst and 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
4 Half wave; half wave control. The load power depends on the
relation ton / toff and is controlled by 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref:
Appendix Leg 2.
Appendix Leg 3.
Step 4 / 11: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and loads connected via transformer
There is a transformer between the unit’s output and the load.
Step 12: Common controlled loads, leg 2 and leg 3 follow leg 1 via transformer
U1 V1 W1
99.10 =
Alpha
control 
or
full wave
(burst)
Current Leg 1
IL1
Current Leg 2
IL2
Current Leg 3
IL3
U2 V2 W2
Start-up procedure

72

99.03 Load Voltage Rated load voltage or voltage at primary side of the transformer, depending
on what voltage should be controlled.
0: 3ph UVW E.g. for units with 3 legs (W03).
1: 3ph UW eco E.g. for units with 2 legs (W02).
5: 3ph transformer (3D/3S) The load is connected via a 3-phase delta

or star transformer.
6: 3ph transformer UV (6D) The load is connected via a 3-phase

open delta transformer (clockwise phase
connection U V W).
7: 3ph transformer UW (6D) The load is connected via a 3-phase

open delta transformer (anti-clockwise
phase connection U W V).
Start-up procedure

73
10: 3 x 1ph transformer loads The loads are connected as single-phase

loads via single-phase transformers.
Appendix Leg 1.
Time.
Additional settings for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full wave fix cycle (= 2) via transformer
99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode Defines the start mode of leg 1.
1 First angle; for transformer loads. This prevents the high inrush
current of transformers. The first thyristors are fired with the firing
angle in 99.13 Leg 1 First Angle.
2 Soft start; at start the firing angle is moved from 180° … 0° using
the amount of periods in 99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Ramp.
Switching OFF is done by setting the firing angle directly to 180°.
3 Soft start / soft down; at start the firing angle is moved from 180° …
0° using the amount of periods in 99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start
Ramp. At switching OFF the firing angle is moved to 180°
depending on 99.15 Leg 1 Burst Soft Down Ramp.
4 Soft start / first angle; see 1: First angle and 2: Soft start.
99.13 Leg 1 First Angle Starting angle for leg 1, mainly used for transformer loads. 90.0° is e.g. the
phase shift between voltage and current of a transformer. Note:
Recommended setting 75.0° … 115.0°.
99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Soft start time in periods in which the firing angle is moved from 180° … 0°.
Ramp
Start-up procedure

74
99.15 Leg 1 Burst Soft Down Soft down ramp in periods in which the firing angle is moved from 0° … 180°.
Ramp
Additional settings for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Alpha controls (= 5 … 12) via transformer
99.16 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Soft start time in which the reference is ramped from 0 … 100 %.
Start Ramp
99.17 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Soft down time in which the reference is ramped from 100 … 0 %.
Down Ramp
Step 4 / 11: Basic settings for 3-phase mains and loads connected via transformer
Step 13: Individual controlled loads, leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3 are independent via transformer
U1 V1 W1
99.10 =
Alpha
control αU1
or
full wave αV1
(burst)
αW1
Current Leg 1
IL1
Current Leg 2
IL2
Current Leg 3
IL3
U2 V2 W2

99.01 Supply Voltage … 99.05 Load Configuration see above.
Appendix Leg 1.
Time.
Start-up procedure

75
Appendix Leg 2.
Appendix Leg 3.
Leg 1
2 Soft start; at start the firing angle is moved from 180° … 0° using the
amount of periods in 99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Ramp. Switching
OFF is done by setting the firing angle directly to 180°.
0° using the amount of periods in 99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Ramp.
At switching OFF the firing angle is moved to 180° depending on
99.15 Leg 1 Burst Soft Down Ramp.
Ramp
Ramp
Leg 2
Ramp
Ramp
Leg 3
Start-up procedure

76
Ramp
Ramp
Leg 1
99.16 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft start time in which the reference is ramped from 0 … 100 %.
Soft Start Ramp
99.17 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft down time in which the reference is ramped from 100 … 0 %.
Soft Down Ramp
Leg 2
Soft Start Ramp
Soft Down Ramp
Leg 3
Soft Start Ramp
Soft Down Ramp
Start-up procedure

77
Step 8 / 14: Basic settings for single-phase mains and loads connected via
transformer
Step 15: Individual controlled loads, leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3 are independent via transformer
U1 V1 W1
99.10 =
Alpha
control αU1
or
full wave αV1
(burst)
αW1
Current Leg 1
IL1
Current Leg 2
IL2
Current Leg 3
IL3
U2 V2 W2

2: 3 x 1ph + N For units with 3 legs (W03) or 2 legs

(W02) connected to single-phase mains.
6: 3ph transformer UV (6D) The load is connected via a 3-phase

open delta transformer (clockwise phase
connection U V W).
Start-up procedure

78
7: 3ph transformer UW (6D) The load is connected via a 3-phase

open delta transformer (anti-clockwise
10: 3 x 1ph transformer loads The loads are connected as single-phase

loads via single-phase transformers.
Appendix Leg 1.
Time.
Appendix Leg 2.
Appendix Leg 3.
Start-up procedure

79
Leg 1
Ramp
Ramp
Leg 2
Ramp
Ramp
Leg 3
Start-up procedure

80
Ramp
Ramp
Leg 1
Soft Start Ramp
Soft Down Ramp
Leg 2
Soft Start Ramp
Soft Down Ramp
Leg 3
Soft Start Ramp
Soft Down Ramp
Step 16: Setting up the command chain
At factory setting (default) the command chain is set the following way (control via hardware, XDI):
Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3

Enable command 19.01 = DI1 19.03 = DI1 19.05 = DI1
Run command 19.02 = DI2 19.04 = DI2 19.06 = DI2
Reset 19.15 = DI3
Common control ① 19.30 = Separate
① Selects, whether each leg is operating independent or all legs are reacting to leg 1 enable and
run commands.
The status of the digital inputs can be seen in 10.01 DI status.

For different settings use parameters in Group 19.
Start-up procedure

81
Step 17: Setting up the reference chain

At factory setting (default) analog inputs AI1 … AI3 are connected to the reference chain:
Leg 1 Leg 2 ② Leg 3 ②

Ref. 22.15 = AI1 scaled (12.12) 24.15 = AI1 scaled (12.12) 26.15 = AI1 scaled (12.12)
② Not valid in case of common control (99.25 Leg 2 Control Mode = 99.40 Leg 3 Control Mode =
Follow Leg 1).
The value of the analog inputs can be seen in:
AI1 12.11 AI1 actual value 12.12 AI1 scaled value

For different settings use parameters in Groups 22, 24 and 26.
Connect digital inputs (XDI)
Connect relay outputs (XRO1 … XRO3)
Other [bit]; bit source selection from the parameter / signal list
The value is taken from a specific bit of another parameter / signal. Choosing “Other” displays a parameter /
signal list in which the user can choose the source parameter / signal and bit.
Example:
Connect unit ‘no fault’ to RO2 with:
 no fault = 06.13 Global Status Word bit 1 Any Fault- and
 RO2 = 10.27 RO2 source.
Start-up procedure

82
Control panel Drive composer

1. The source for RO2 is connected via
10.27 RO2 source.
2. In 10.27 RO2 source choose Other:
3. Choose group 6 Control and status

words:
4. Choose 06.13 Global Status Word:
5. Choose 06.13 Global Status Word bit 1

Any Fault:
6. Choose invert to get ‘no fault’:
7. Result, see 10.27 RO2 source =

06.13.01 Any Fault (-1) or P.6.13.0-:
Start-up procedure

83
Connecting analog inputs (XAI)

AI1 connected to the reference chain of leg 1:
① Set jumper J1 to voltage or current depending on the desired input configuration.

② Set 12.15 AI1 unit selection to match the input configuration. 12.11 AI1 actual value displays the
value of AI1 in mA or V.
③ Scale the analog input from voltage or current to the desired internal value.
④ 12.12 AI1 scaled value displays the value of AI1 after scaling.
⑤ 22.15 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Selector selects the source for the reference.
Connecting analog outputs (XAO)

AO1 connected to a parameter / signal value:
① 13.12 AO1 source selects the desired parameter / signal value (preferred: relative values in %).
② Scale the analog output from the internal value to voltage or current.
③ Set 13.15 AO1 unit selection to match the output configuration. 13.11 AO1 actual value displays
the value of AO1 in mA or V.
④ Set jumper J5 to voltage or current depending on the desired output configuration.
Other; word source selection from the parameter / signal list
The value is taken from another parameter / signal. Choosing “Other” displays a parameter / signal list in
which the user can choose the source parameter / signal.
Example:
Connect unit 3-phase actual current to AO1 with:
 3-phase actual current = 01.36 3ph Current RMS actual and
 AO1 = 13.12 AO1 source.
Start-up procedure

84
Control panel Drive composer

1. The source for AO1 is connected via
13.12 AO1 source.
2. In 13.12 AO1 source choose Other:
3. Choose group 1 Actual values:
4. Choose 01.36 3ph Current RMS actual:
5. Result, see 13.12 AO1 source = 01.36

3ph Current RMS actual or P.1.36:
Start-up procedure

85
Step 18: Run the operation check

Perform the operation check.
1. Make sure no faults or warnings are present. See 06.13 Global Status Word.
2. Remember settings of:
99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode.
3. For common controlled loads (leg 2 and leg 3 follow leg 1) set:
99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = U α open loop control (= 5); phase angle control.
99.25 Leg 2 Control Mode = Follow Leg 1 (= 13); use the same control mode as leg 1.
99.40 Leg 3 Control Mode = Follow Leg 1 (= 13); use the same control mode as leg 1.
For individual controlled loads (leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3 are independent) set:
4. Make sure, all references are set to zero:
23.01 Leg 1 Main Ref (22.11).
25.01 Leg 2 Main Ref (24.11), only for individual controlled loads.
27.01 Leg 3 Main Ref (26.11), only for individual controlled loads.
5. Give the enable command and then run command. See 06.08 Used Main Control Word.
Note: For individual controlled loads do this for each leg separately.
6. Increase the reference.
Note: For individual controlled loads do this for each leg separately.
7. Check the load currents:
01.30 Leg 1 Current RMS actual.
Notes:
For common controlled loads make sure the three currents are symmetrical.
For individual controlled loads do this for each leg separately.
8. Set all references back to zero.
9. To switch off remove the run command and then enable command. See 06.08 Used Main Control Word.
Note: For individual controlled loads do this for all legs.
10. Set 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode, 99.25 Leg 2 Control Mode and 99.40 Leg 3 Control Mode back to the
original values.
11. Test the unit using the desired modes in 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode, 99.25 Leg 2 Control Mode and 99.40
Leg 3 Control Mode.
Start-up procedure

86
Parameters
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes the parameters and signals of the firmware.
Terms and abbreviations
Term Definition
Signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by the unit, or
contains status information. Most signals are read-only, but some (especially counter-
type signals) can be reset.
Default (def.) The default value of a parameter.
Scale / Fbeq16 16 bit fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the
integer used in communication when a 16 bit value is selected for transmission to an
external system.
A dash (-) indicates that the parameter is not accessible in 16 bit format.
Other The value is taken from another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can specify the source
parameter.
Other [bit] The value is taken from a specific bit in another parameter.
Choosing “Other” displays a parameter list in which the user can specify the source
parameter and bit.
Parameter A user-adjustable operating instruction for the unit.
p.u. Per unit
Summary of parameter groups
Group Contents
1 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring the unit.
3 Input references Values of references received from various sources.
4 Warnings and faults Information on warnings and faults that occurred last. For explanations
of individual warning and fault codes, see chapter Troubleshooting.
5 Diagnostics Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to the unit’s
maintenance.
6 Control and status word The unit’s control, status and event words.
7 System info The unit’s hardware and firmware information.
10 Standard DI, RO Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
11 Standard DIO, FI, FO Configuration of digital input / outputs and frequency inputs / outputs.
12 Standard AI Configuration of standard analog inputs.
13 Standard AO Configuration of standard analog outputs.
14 I/O extension module 1 Configuration of I/O extension module 1.
19 Start/Stop Mode Selection of local and external control locations and operating modes.
21 General References Includes fix-, external references and motor potentiometer settings.
22 Leg 1 Reference Chain Leg 1 reference source selection.
23 Leg 1 Control Detailed Leg 1 control chain includes ramps, current / voltage / power control,
control mode selector and limiters.
28 Unit Faults Configuration of external events, selection of behavior of the thyristor
power controller upon fault situations.
29 Multitap Configuration when using a transformer with multitaps.
30 Leg 1 Limits Thyristor power controller operation limits.
Parameters

87

33 Maintenance timer & counter Configuration of maintenance timers / counters.
35 Thermal Measurement Temperature measurement configuration.
36 Leg 1 Load monitoring Load resistance measurement, load loss function and overload function.
41 Process PID 1 Parameter values for process PID 1.
45 Energy efficiency Settings for the energy saving calculators.
46 Monitoring Signal filtering and general settings.
47 Data storage Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using
other parameters.
49 Panel port communication Communication settings for the control panel port of the unit.
50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA) Fieldbus communication configuration.
51 FBA A settings Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
52 FBA A data in Selection of data sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (e.g. PLC).
53 FBA A data out Selection of data sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus adapter A.
54 FBA B settings Fieldbus adapter B configuration.
55 FBA B data in Selection of data sent by fieldbus adapter B to the master (e.g. PLC).
56 FBA B data out Selection of data sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus adapter B.
58 Embedded fieldbus Embedded fieldbus configuration.
60 DDCS communication DDCS (fiber optic) communication configuration.
61 D2D and DDCS transmit data Defines the data sent from the unit to the DDCS / D2D link.
62 D2D and DDCS receive data Defines the data sent from the DDCS / D2D link to the unit.
95 HW configuration Various hardware-related settings.

96 System Language selection; access levels; macro selection; parameter save
and restore; unit reboot; user parameter sets; unit selection.
99 Basic Settings Unit configuration settings.
Parameters

88
Parameter listing
Group 1 Actual Values
Basic signals for monitoring the unit.
Index Name
Text
Range Default Unit Scale / Volatile Change - Type
Fbeq16 running
01.01 Voltage U1 - N actual
Actual phase voltage U1 - N.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.02 Voltage V1 - N actual
Actual phase voltage V1 - N.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.03 Voltage W1 - N actual
Actual phase voltage W1 - N.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.04 Voltage U1 - N relative actual
Relative actual phase voltage U1 - N.
In percent of 99.01 Supply Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.05 Voltage V1 - N relative actual
Relative actual phase voltage V1 - N.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.06 Voltage W1 - N relative actual
Relative actual phase voltage W1 - N.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.07 Voltage U1 - V1 actual
Actual phase-to-phase voltage U1 - V1.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.08 Voltage V1 - W1 actual
Actual phase-to-phase voltage V1 - W1.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.09 Voltage W1 - U1 actual
Actual phase-to-phase voltage W1 - U1.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.10 Voltage U1 - V1 relative actual
Relative actual phase-to-phase voltage U1 - V1.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.11 Voltage V1 - W1 relative actual
Relative actual phase-to-phase voltage V1 - W1.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.12 Voltage W1 - U1 relative actual
Relative actual phase-to-phase voltage W1 - U1.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.13 Voltage U2 - N actual
Actual phase voltage U2 - N.
Measured or calculated depending on 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.14 Voltage V2 - N actual
Actual phase voltage V2 - N.
Parameters

89
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.15 Voltage W2 - N actual
Actual phase voltage W2 - N.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.16 Voltage U2 - N relative actual
Relative actual phase voltage U2 - N.
In percent of 99.03 Load Voltage. Measured or calculated depending on 99.60 Voltage
Measurement Configuration.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.17 Voltage V2 - N relative actual
Relative actual phase voltage V2 - N.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.18 Voltage W2 - N relative actual
Relative actual phase voltage W2 - N.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.20 Voltage U2 - V2 actual
Actual phase-to-phase voltage U2 - V2.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.21 Voltage V2 - W2 actual
Actual phase-to-phase voltage U2 - W2.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.22 Voltage W2 - U2 actual
Actual phase-to-phase voltage V2 - W2.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.23 Voltage U2 - V2 relative actual
Relative actual phase-to-phase voltage U2 - V2.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.24 Voltage V2 - W2 relative actual
Relative actual phase-to-phase voltage U2 - W2.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.25 Voltage W2 - U2 relative actual
Relative actual phase-to-phase voltage V2 - W2.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.26 Mains Voltage Leg 1 relative
Relative mains voltage leg 1 / U1.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Relative mains voltage leg 2 / V1.
Parameters

90
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Relative mains voltage leg 3 / W1.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.30 Leg 1 Current RMS actual
Actual RMS current leg 1 / U2.
0.0 … 30000.0 - A 1=1 y n Signal
Actual RMS current leg 2 / V2.
0.0 … 30000.0 - A 1=1 y n Signal
Actual RMS current leg 3 / W2.
0.0 … 30000.0 - A 1=1 y n Signal
01.33 Leg 1 Current RMS relative actual
Actual RMS current leg 1 / U2 relative.
In percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Actual RMS current leg 2 / V2 relative.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Actual RMS current leg 3 / W2 relative.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.36 3ph Current RMS actual
Average actual three phase RMS current.
Sum of 01.30 Leg 1 Current RMS actual, 01.31 Leg 2 Current RMS actual and 01.32 Leg 3
Current RMS actual divided by three:
01.30 + 01.31 + 01.32
3
0.0 … 30000.0 - A 1=1 y n Signal
01.37 3ph Current RMS relative actual
Average actual three phase RMS current relative.
Sum of 01.33 Leg 1 Current RMS relative actual, 01.34 Leg 2 Current RMS relative actual and
01.35 Leg 3 Current RMS relative actual divided by three:
01.33 + 01.34 + 01.35
3
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.40 Leg 1 Alpha actual
Actual firing angle leg 1 / U1.
0.0 … 180.0 - ° 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
Actual firing angle leg 2 / V1.
0.0 … 180.0 - ° 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
Actual firing angle leg 3 / W1.
0.0 … 180.0 - ° 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
01.50 Leg 1 Power actual
Actual power leg 1 / U2.
Parameters

91
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.0 … 5000.0 - kW 1=1 y n Signal
Actual power leg 2 / V2.
0.0 … 5000.0 - kW 1=1 y n Signal
Actual power leg 3 / W2.
0.0 … 5000.0 - kW 1=1 y n Signal
01.53 Leg 1 Power relative actual
Actual power leg 1 / U2 relative.
In percent of 99.09 Load Power. Measured or calculated depending on 99.60 Voltage
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Actual power leg 2 / V2 relative.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Actual power leg 3 / W2 relative.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.56 3ph Power actual
Actual three phase power.
Sum of 01.50 Leg 1 Power actual, 01.51 Leg 2 Power actual and 01.52 Leg 3 Power actual:
01.50 + 01.51 + 01.52
0.0 … 5000.0 - kW 1=1 y n Signal
01.57 3ph Power relative actual
Actual relative three phase power.
Complete power of all connected loads in percent of 99.09 Load Power. Measured or calculated
depending on 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.60 Leg 1 Voltage RMS relative actual
Leg 1 / U2 actual relative RMS voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 2 / V2 actual relative RMS voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 3 / W2 actual relative RMS voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.65 Peak Current Thyristor 11 relative
Relative peak current of thyristor 11.
Parameters

92
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
For sinusoidal waveform is valid:
All displayed values are multiplied by a factor of √2, thus e.g. 100 % load current is shown as
140 % in 01.65 Peak Current Thyristor 11 relative.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.71 AVR Current Thyristor 11 relative
Average current of thyristor 11.
2
All displayed values are multiplied by a factor of , thus e.g. 100 % load current is shown as 64
𝜋
% in 01.71 AVR Current Thyristor 11 relative.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
2
𝜋
Parameters

93
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
2
𝜋
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
2
𝜋
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
2
𝜋
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
2
𝜋
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.77 Leg 1 Current real time relative
Real time relative current leg 1 / U2 sampled in 250 µs.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Real time relative current leg 2 / V2 sampled in 250 µs.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Real time relative current leg 3 / W2 sampled in 250 µs.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.80 Leg 1 Reactive power relative
Relative reactive power leg 1 / U2.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Relative reactive power leg 2 / V2.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Parameters

94
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Relative reactive power leg 3 / W2.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
01.83 3ph Reactive power relative
Relative reactive power 3ph.
Complete reactive power of all connected loads in percent of 99.09 Load Power. Measured or
calculated depending on 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Group 3 Input references

Values of references received from various sources.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
03.01 Panel reference 1
Reference 1 given from the control panel or PC tool.
Reference 1 given from the control panel or PC tool (drive composer via USB) in percent of or
temperature, nominal load current, load voltage or load power.
See e.g. 35.07 Temp 1 max, 99.02 Load Current, 99.03 Load Voltage and 99.09 Load Power.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.03 Ethernet PC tool reference 1
Reference 1 given from PC tool.
Reference 1 given from PC tool (drive composer via FENA) in percent of or temperature, nominal
load current, load voltage or load power.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.05 FB A reference 1
Reference 1 received via fieldbus adapter A.
Reference 1 received via fieldbus adapter A (see parameters 53.01 … 53.12) in percent of or
See also chapter Fieldbus control via a fieldbus adapter.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.06 FB A reference 2
Reference 2 received via fieldbus adapter A.
Reference 2 received via fieldbus adapter A (see parameters 53.01 … 53.12) in percent of or
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.07 FB B reference 1
Reference 1 received via fieldbus adapter B.
Reference 1 received via fieldbus adapter B (see parameters 56.01 … 56.12) in percent of or
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.08 FB B reference 2
Reference 2 received via fieldbus adapter B.
Reference 2 received via fieldbus adapter B (see parameters 56.01 … 56.12) in percent of or
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Parameters

95
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
03.09 EFB reference 1
Reference 1 received via the embedded fieldbus.
Reference 1 received via the embedded fieldbus (see parameters 58.101 … 58.124) in percent
of or temperature, nominal load current, load voltage or load power.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.10 EFB reference 2
Reference 2 received via the embedded fieldbus.
Reference 2 received via the embedded fieldbus (see parameters 58.101 … 58.124) in percent
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.11 DDCS controller ref 1
Reference 1 received from an external DDCS-PLC.
Reference 1 received from an external DDCS-PLC in percent of or temperature, nominal load
current, load voltage or load power.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.12 DDCS controller ref 2
Reference 2 received from an external DDCS-PLC
Reference 2 received from an external DDCS-PLC in percent of or temperature, nominal load
current, load voltage or load power.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.13 M/F or D2D ref1
Master/follower reference 1 received from the master (followers only).
Master/follower reference 1 received from the master (see parameters 61.01 … 62.03) in percent
See also section Master/follower functionality.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
03.14 M/F or D2D ref2
Master/follower reference 2 received from the master (followers only).
Master/follower reference 2 received from the master (see parameters 61.01 … 62.03) in percent
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Group 4 Warnings and faults

Information on warnings and faults that occurred last. For explanations of individual warning and fault codes,
see chapter Troubleshooting.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
04.01 Tripping fault
Code of the 1st active fault (the fault that caused the current trip).
0000h … FFFFh - - 1=1 y n Signal
04.02 Active fault 2
Code of the 2nd active fault.
Code of the 3rd active fault.
Parameters

96
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Code of the 4th active fault.
Code of the 5th active fault.
04.06 Active warning 1
Code of the 1st active warning.
Code of the 2nd active warning.
Code of the 3rd active warning.
Code of the 4th active warning.
Code of the 5th active warning.
04.11 Latest fault
Code of the 1st stored (non-active) fault.
04.12 2nd latest fault
Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) fault.
04.13 3rd latest fault
Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) fault.
04.14 4th latest fault
Code of the 4th stored (non-active) fault.
04.15 5th latest fault
Code of the 5th stored (non-active) fault.
04.16 Latest warning
Code of the 1st stored (non-active) warning.
04.17 2nd latest warning
Code of the 2nd stored (non-active) warning.
04.18 3rd latest warning
Code of the 3rd stored (non-active) warning.
04.19 4th latest warning
Code of the 4th stored (non-active) warning.
04.20 5th latest warning
Code of the 5th stored (non-active) warning.
04.23 Diagnostics
Parameters

97
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Additional information on last event.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
Group 5 Diagnostics
Various run-time-type counters and measurements related to the unit’s maintenance.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
05.01 On-time counter
On-time counter.
The counter runs when the thyristor power controller is powered (24 VDC is on).
0 … 65535 - days 1=1 y n Signal
05.02 Load run-time counter
Load run-time counter.
The counter runs when leg 1 thyristor power controller runs (load current is present).
0 … 65535 - days 1=1 y n Signal
05.04 Fan on-time counter
Run time of the units cooling fan.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds. Will not be
active with unit sizes T1 … T5.
0 … 65535 - days 1=1 y n Signal
05.10 Control board temperature
Measured actual control board temperature
-60.0 … 1000.0 - °C 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
05.50 Power part temperature
Measured actual power part temperature.
-60.0 … 1000.0 - °C 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
Group 6 Control and status words

The unit’s control, status and event words.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
06.01 Main Control Word active
Main control word active.
This signal shows the control signals as received from the selected sources (such as digital
inputs, the fieldbus interfaces and the application program), see 06.06 MCW Source.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low Remarks

0 Leg 1 Enable Enable Disable Mains contactor ON command.
Fans ON command.
1 Leg 1 Run Run Stop
Fans ON command.
Fans ON command.
6 Bit 6
Parameters

98
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
7 Reset Reset No action
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Remote CMD Enable No action Overriding control / IEC
programming enabled (overriding
control / IEC programming has to
set this bit to 1).
11 … 15 Bit 11 … 15
Note: Bits 11 … 15 can be used to carry additional control data. Additionally they can be used
as a signal source by any binary-source selector parameter (see: Other [bit], source selection).
06.02 Application Control Word
Control word written to by IEC programming.
0000h … FFFFh - - 1=1 y y Parameter
06.03 FBA A CW
Control word received via fieldbus adapter A, see parameters 53.01 … 53.12.
06.04 FBA B CW
Control word received via fieldbus adapter B, see parameters 56.01 … 56.12.
06.05 EFB CW
Control word received via embedded fieldbus, see parameters 58.101 … 58.124.
06.06 MCW Source
Selects the source for 06.01 Main control word active.
Other; source selection.
0: None; inactive.
1: FBA A (6.03); 06.03 FBA A CW.
2: FBA B (6.04); 06.04 FBA B CW.
3: EFB (6.05); 06.05 EFB CW.
4: Application (6.02); 06.02 Application Control Word.
5: D2D (6.94); 06.94 Follower Control Word received (follower only).
0…5 None - 1=1 n y Parameter
06.07 Auxiliary Control Word 1
First auxiliary control word.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 … 15
0000h … FFFFh - - 1=1 y y Parameter

06.08 Used Main Control Word
Used main control word.
Main control word used by the internal unit logic.
Bit assignment:

Fans ON command.
Fans ON command.
Parameters

99
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Fans ON command.
6 Bit 6
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Remote CMD No action No action Not in use
11 Leg 1 Remote Remote No action When high: Follower leg 1 is
controlled by master
(automatically set).
14 … 15 Bit 14 … 15

06.09 Follower Control Word
Follower control word to followers (master only).
06.09 Follower Control Word is send by the master, using D2D link, to 06.94 Follower Control
Word received in all followers.
Bit assignment:

Fans ON command.
1 Leg 1 Run Run and no active Stop or active
fault in master fault in master
Fans ON command.
Fans ON command.
6 Bit 6
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
Parameters

100
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
14 Bit 14
15 Master Warning / Fault Warning /
Warning / active Fault inactive
Fault

06.13 Global Status Word
Global status word.
06.13 Global Status Word contains collective messages of the whole unit. The individual
message are shown in 06.14 Leg 1 Status Word, 06.15 Leg 2 Status Word and 06.16 Leg 3
Status Word.
Bit assignment:

0 Any Warning Warning active Warning inactive Collective warning message
1 Any Fault Fault active Fault inactive Collective fault message
2 Enabled Enabled Not enabled Collective enable message,
high when one of the legs is
enabled
3 Operating In operation Not in operation Collective operating
message, high when one of
the legs is in operation
4 … 15 Bit 4 … 15

06.14 Leg 1 Status Word
Status word for leg 1.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 Leg 1 Warning Warning active Warning inactive
1 Leg 1 Fault Fault active Fault inactive
2 Leg 1 Sync Synchronized to mains Not synchronized to mains
3 Leg 1 Enabled Enabled Not enabled
4 Leg 1 Operating In operation Not in operation
5 Leg 1 Current Limit active Current limit active Current limit inactive
6 Leg 1 Voltage Limit active Voltage limit active Voltage limit inactive
7 Leg 1 Power Limit active Power limit active Power limit inactive
8 Leg 1 at Reference Output is at reference Output is not at reference
(more than 5 % deviation)
9 Leg 1 Burst Operation Burst operation active Burst operation inactive
10 Leg 1 Remote Remote Local
11 Mains Contactor ON Cmd Mains contactor on -
command
12 Fans ON Cmd Fans on command -
13 Leg 1 Current flow Current detected (see No current detected
36.12 Leg 1 Load Loss
Current level)
14 Bit 14
15 Bit 15

Parameters

101
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Bit assignment:
See 06.14 Leg 1 Status Word.
Bit assignment:
See 06.14 Leg 1 Status Word.
06.20 User Status Word 1
First user defined status word.
This word shows the status of the binary sources selected by parameters 06.21 … 06.36.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 User status bit 0
1 User status bit 1
2 User status bit 2
3 User status bit 3
4 User status bit 4
5 User status bit 5
6 User status bit 6
7 User status bit 7
8 User status bit 8
9 User status bit 9
10 User status bit 10

06.21 User Status Word 1 bit 0 sel
Binary source for bit 0.
Selects a binary source whose status is shown as bit 0 of 6.20 User Status Word 1.
Other [bit]; source selection.
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0…1 FALSE - 1=1 n y Parameter
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
Parameters

102
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
Parameters

103
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
06.40 User Status Word 2
Second user defined status word.
This word shows the status of the binary sources selected by parameters 06.41 … 06.56.
Bit assignment:
See 06.20 User Status Word 1.
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
Parameters

104
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
Parameters

105
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
0: FALSE;
1: TRUE;
06.60 Global Fault Word 1
First global fault word.
Each bit represents one specific event:
Bit Name High Low

0 Type Code Mismatch Active Inactive
1 Option Error Active Inactive
Parameters

106
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2 Communication Error Active Inactive
3 Overtemperature Power Part Active Inactive
4 Inconsistent Data Active Inactive
5 Enable Circuit Fault Active Inactive
6 Overtemperature Load Active Inactive
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Mains Synchronization Fault Active Inactive
12 Unicos Fault Active Inactive
13 Control Builder application Fault Active Inactive
14 … 15 Bit 14 … 15

06.61 Global Fault Word 2
Second global fault word.
Bit Name High Low

0 … 15 Bit 0 … 15

06.62 Global Warning Word
Global warning word.
Bit Name High Low

0 Parameter Setting Mismatch Active Inactive
1 Bit 1
2 Bit 2
3 Overtemperature Power Part Active Inactive
4 Bit 4
5 Bit 5
6 Overtemperature Load Active Inactive
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Mains Synchronization Warning Active Inactive
12 …15 Bit 12 … 15

06.63 External Event Word
External event word.
Bit Name High Low

0 External Event 1 Active Inactive
Parameters

107
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
5 … 15 Bit 5 … 15

06.66 Leg 1 Fault Word
Fault word for leg 1.
Bit Name High Low

0 Overcurrent Active Inactive
1 Mains Overvoltage Active Inactive
2 Thyristor Short Circuit Active Inactive
3 Thyristor Open Circuit Active Inactive
4 Mains Undervoltage Active Inactive
5 Unit Thermal Overload Active Inactive
6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

06.71 Leg 1 Warning Word
Warning word for leg 1.
Bit Name High Low

Parameters

108
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

06.76 Leg 1 Load Fault Word
Fault word for the load of leg 1.
Bit Name High Low

0 Load Loss Active Inactive
1 Partial Load Loss Active Inactive
2 Partial Load Short Circuit Active Inactive
3 Load Overload Active Inactive
4 Load Aging Active Inactive
5 Load Current Imbalance Active Inactive
6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Parameters

109
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Bit Name High Low
6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

06.81 Leg 1 Load Warning Word
Warning word for the load of leg 1.
Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Parameters

110
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

06.90 Multitap Status Word 1
First status word for multitap.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 … 15 Bit 0 … 15

06.91 Multitap Status Word 2
Second status word for multitap.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 … 15 Bit 0 … 15

06.93 Follower Status Word
Follower status word (followers only).
The follower status word can be transferred from the followers to the master, see groups 61 and
62.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 Ready for On Unit is ready to be switched Unit is not ready to be switched
on on
1 Enabled Enabled Not enabled
2 Operating In operation Not in operation
3 Any Fault Fault active Fault inactive
4 Bit 4
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 6
7 Any Warning Warning active Warning inactive
8 … 15 Bit 8 … 15

06.94 Follower Control Word received
Follower control word received from master (see parameters 61.01 … 61.03, followers only).
06.09 Follower Control Word is send by the master, using D2D link, to 06.94 Follower Control
Word received in all followers.
Bit assignment:
Parameters

111
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Fans ON command.
Fans ON command.
Fans ON command.
6 Bit 6
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
14 Bit 14
15 Master Warning / Fault Warning /
Warning / active Fault inactive
Fault
Group 7 System info

The unit’s hardware and firmware information.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
07.03 Unit rating id
Type of the unit.
Example: ????
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
07.04 Firmware name
Firmware identification.
Example: DCTF1 = DCT880 Firmware.
- - 1=1 y n Signal
07.05 Firmware version
Version number of the firmware.
Example: 1.05.0.0 = Firmware version 5.
0.000.0.0 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
255.255.255.255
Parameters

112
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
07.06 Application name
Control Builder application name.
First five ASCII signs of the name given to the Control Builder application program. The full
name is visible under system info on the control panel or in the PC tool.
_N/A_: no name;
- - 1=1 y n Signal
07.07 Application version
Control Builder application version number.
Version number given to the Control Builder application program. Also visible under system info
on the control panel or in the PC tool.
Example: 1.04.0.0 = Control Builder application program version 4.
0.000.0.0 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
255.255.255.255
07.08 Control Builder system library version
Control builder system library.
Version number of the Control Builder system library.
Example: 1.09.0.0 = Control Builder library version 9.
0.000.0.0 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
255.255.255.255
07.09 Control Builder application
Control builder license.
Shows if the memory unit has a Control Builder license and if an application is loaded or not.
0: No license; it is not possible to load control builder applications.
1: No application; it is possible to load control builder applications. The memory unit does not
contain an application.
3: Application: see 7.06; it is possible to load control builder applications. The memory unit
contains an application, see 07.06 Application name.
0…3 - - 1=1 y n Signal
07.11 Cpu usage
CPU load.
Microprocessor load in percent.
0 … 100 - % 1=1 y n Signal
07.15 Unit type set
Unit type.
0: Rebuild; for modernization.
1: T1; size T1.
2: T2; size T2.
3: T3; size T3.
4: T4; size T4.
5: T5; size T5.
6: T6; size T6 (reserved).
0…8 - - 1=1 y n Signal
07.16 Unit legs set
Number of legs.
Amount of legs in the unit.
0: Not set;
1: 1 Leg; single-leg circuit.
2: 2 Legs; two-leg circuit.
3: 3 Legs; three-leg circuit.
0…3 - - 1=1 y n Signal
07.17 Unit output current scaling set
Output current scaling.
Parameters

113
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Output current scaling of unit.
0 … 30000 - A 1=1 y n Signal
07.18 Unit output overcurrent level
Output overcurrent level.
Output overcurrent level of unit:
2.3  7.17 Unit output current scaling set.
0 … 30000 - A 1=1 y n Signal
07.19 Unit input voltage scaling set
Input voltage scaling.
Input voltage scaling of unit.
0.0 … 3250.0 - V 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
07.20 Unit max power part temp set
Maximum power part temperature.
Maximum power part temperature of the unit.
0 … 150 - °C 1=1 y n Signal
07.21 Unit Extension Module Status Word
Status word for extension modules.
Bit assignment:
Bit Name High Low

0 … 15 Bit 0 … 15
Group 10 Standard DI, RO

Configuration of digital inputs and relay outputs.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
10.01 DI status
Status of digital inputs.
Displays the electrical status of DI1 … DI6 and DIL. The activation / deactivation delays of the
inputs (if any are specified) are ignored.
Bits 0 … 5 reflect the status of DI1 … DI6. Bit 15 reflects the status of the DIL input.
Example: 1000000000010011b = DIL, DI5, DI2 and DI1 are on, DI3, DI4 and DI6 are off:
Bit Name High Low

0 DI1 On Off
1 DI2 On Off
2 DI3 On Off
3 DI4 On Off
4 DI5 On Off
5 DI6 On Off
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Bit 11
12 Bit 12
13 Bit 13
Parameters

114
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
14 Bit 14
15 DIL On Off

10.02 DI delayed status
Delayed status of digital inputs.
Displays the delayed status of DI1 … DI6 and DIL. This word is updated only after activation /
deactivation delays (if any are specified).
Bits 0 … 5 reflect the delayed status of DI1 … DI6. Bit 15 reflects the delayed status of the DIL
input.
Example: 1000000000010011b = DIIL, DI5, DI2 and DI1 are on, DI3, DI4 and DI6 are off:
Bit Name High Low

0 DI1 On Off
1 DI2 On Off
2 DI3 On Off
3 DI4 On Off
4 DI5 On Off
5 DI6 On Off
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Bit 11
12 Bit 12
13 Bit 13
14 Bit 14
15 DIL On Off

10.03 DI force selection
Override selection for digital inputs.
The electrical status of DI1 … DI6 and DIL can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A bit in
10.04 DI force data is provided for each digital input and its value is applied whenever the
corresponding bit in 10.03 DI force selection is 1:
Bit Name High Low

0 DI1 Force DI1 to value of bit 0 of 10.04 DI force data. No action
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Bit 11
12 Bit 12
13 Bit 13
14 Bit 14
Parameters

115
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
15 DIL Force DIL to value of bit 15 of 10.04 DI force data. No action
0000h … FFFFh 0000h - 1=1 y y Parameter

10.04 DI force data
Forced values of digital inputs.
Allows the data value of a forced DI1 … DI6 and DIL to be changed from 0 to 1. It is only
possible to force an input that has been selected in 10.03 DI force selection.
Bits 0 … 5 are the forced values for DI1 … DI6. Bit 15 is the forced value for the DIL input:
Bit Name High Low

0 DI1 Force DI1 to on. Force DI1 to off.
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Bit 11
12 Bit 12
13 Bit 13
14 Bit 14
15 DIL Force DIL to on. Force DIL to off.

10.05 DI1 ON delay
Activation delay for digital input DI1.
Defines the activation delay for DI1.
tOn = 10.05 DI1 ON delay

tOff = 10.06 DI1 OFF delay
*Electrical status of digital input. Indicated by 10.01 DI status.
**Indicated by 10.02 DI delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.06 DI1 OFF delay
Deactivation delay for digital input DI1.
Defines the deactivation delay for DI1.
See 10.05 DI1 ON delay.
Parameters

116
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.07 DI2 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.08 DI2 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.09 DI3 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.10 DI3 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.11 DI4 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.12 DI4 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.13 DI5 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.14 DI5 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.15 DI6 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.16 DI6 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.21 RO status
Status of relay outputs.
Status of RO1 … RO3.
Parameters

117
Index Name
Text
Range Default Unit
Scale / Volatile Change - Type
Fbeq16 running
Example: 0000000000000001b = RO1 is energized, RO2 … RO3 are de-energized:
Bit Name High Low

0 RO1 Energized De-energized
3 … 15 Bit 3 … 15

10.24 RO1 source
Source for relay output RO1.
Selects a signal / parameter bit to be connected to RO1.
0: Not energized; output is not energized.
1: Energized; output is energized.
40: RO/DIO control word bit0; bit 0 of 10.99 RO/DIO control word.
0 … 44 Not - 1=1 n y Parameter
energized
10.25 RO1 ON delay
Activation delay for relay output RO1.
Defines the activation delay for RO1.
tOn = 10.25 RO1 ON delay

tOff = 10.26 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.26 RO1 OFF delay
Deactivation delay for relay output RO1.
Defines the deactivation delay for RO1.
See 10.25 RO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.27 RO2 source
See 10.24 RO1 source.
energized
10.28 RO2 ON delay
Parameters

118
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.29 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.30 RO3 source
See 10.24 RO1 source.
energized
10.31 RO3 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for RO3
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.32 RO3 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
10.99 RO/DIO control word
Control word for relay outputs (RO) and digital inputs / outputs (DIO).
Storage parameter to control relay outputs and digital inputs / outputs via e.g. a fieldbus.
To control the relay outputs and the digital inputs / outputs of the unit, send a control word with
the bit assignments shown below e.g. as Modbus I/O data (see 58.101 Data I/O 1 … 58.124
Data I/O 24).
Example for relay output RO1:
58.101 Data I/O 1 = RO/DIO control word and 10.24 RO1 source = RO/DIO control word bit0.
Bit assignment:

0 RO1 Energized De-energized Bit for relay output RO1, see 10.24
RO1 source.
RO2 source.
RO3 source.
3 Bit 3
4 Bit 4
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7
8 DIO1 Energized De-energized Bit for digital input / output DIO1, see
11.06 DIO1 output source.
9 DIO2 Energized De-energized Bit for digital input / output DIO2, see
11.10 DIO2 output source.
10 … 15 Bit 10 … 15
0000h … FFFFh - - 1=1 n y Parameter
Parameters

119
Group 11 Standard DIO, FI, FO

Configuration of digital input / outputs and frequency inputs / outputs.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
11.01 DIO status
Status of digital inputs / outputs.
Displays the status of DIO1 … DIO2. The activation / deactivation delays (if any are specified)
are ignored.
Bits 0 … 1 reflect the status of DIO1 … DIO2.
Example: 000000000000010b = DIO2 is on, DIO1 is off:
Bit Name High Low

0 DIO1 On Off
1 DIO2 On Off
2… 15 Bit 2 … 15

11.02 DIO delayed status
Delayed status of digital inputs / outputs.
Displays the delayed status of DIO1 … DIO2. This word is updated only after activation /
deactivation delays (if any are specified).
Bits 0 … 1 reflect the status of DIO1 … DIO2.
Example: 000000000000010b = DIO2 is on, DIO1 is off:
Bit Name High Low

0 DIO1 On Off
1 DIO2 On Off
2… 15 Bit 2 … 15

11.05 DIO1 function
Function of digital input / output DIO1.
Selects whether DIO1 is used as a digital output or input, or a frequency input.
0: Output; DIO1 is used as a digital output.
1: Input; DIO1 is used as a digital input.
2: Frequency; DIO1 is used as a frequency input.
0…2 Output - 1=1 n y Parameter
11.06 DIO1 output source
Source for digital input / output DIO1.
Selects a signal / parameter bit to be connected to DIO1 when parameter 11.05 DIO1 function =
Output.
0: Not energized; output is off.
1: Energized; output is on.
energized
11.07 DIO1 ON delay
Activation delay for digital input / output DIO1.
Defines the activation delay for DIO1 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
Parameters

120
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
tOn = 11.07 DIO1 ON delay

tOff = 11.08 DIO1 OFF delay
*Electrical status of DIO (in input mode) or status of selected source (in output mode). Indicated
by 11.01 DIO status.
**Indicated by 11.02 DIO delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
11.08 DIO1 OFF delay
Deactivation delay for digital input / output DIO1.
Defines the deactivation delay for DIO1 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
See 11.07 DIO1 ON delay.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
11.09 DIO2 function
Selects whether DIO2 is used as a digital output or input, or a frequency output.
2: Frequency; DIO2 is used as a frequency output.
0…2 Output - 1=1 n y Parameter
Output.
See 11.06 DIO1 output source.
energized
11.11 DIO2 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for DIO2 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Defines the deactivation delay for DIO2 (when used as a digital output or digital input).
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
11.38 Freq in 1 actual value
Unscaled value of frequency input 1.
Displays the value of frequency input 1 in Hz (via DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input)
before scaling.
See 11.42 Freq in 1 min.
0 … 16000 - Hz 1=1 y n Signal
11.39 Freq in 1 scaled
Parameters

121
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Scaled value of frequency input 1.
Displays the value of frequency input 1 (via DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input) after
scaling.
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
11.42 Freq in 1 min
Minimum frequency of frequency input 1.
Defines the minimum input frequency for frequency input 1 in Hz (via DIO1 when it is used as a
frequency input).
Parameters 11.42 and 11.43 set the low and high limit of the frequency input signal in Hz.
Scaling parameters 11.44 and 11.45 define the internal values that correspond to these limits as
follows:
0 … 16000 0 Hz 1=1 n y Parameter

11.43 Freq in 1 max
Maximum frequency for frequency input 1.
Defines the maximum input frequency for frequency input 1 in Hz (via DIO1 when it is used as a
frequency input).
0 … 16000 16000 Hz 1=1 n y Parameter
11.44 Freq in 1 at scaled min
Internal value corresponding to the minimum value of frequency input 1.
Defines the value that corresponds internally to the minimum input frequency defined by 11.42
Freq in 1 min (via DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input).
-32768.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
11.45 Freq in 1 at scaled max
Internal value corresponding to the maximum value of frequency input 1.
Defines the value that corresponds internally to the maximum input frequency defined by 11.43
Freq in 1 max (via DIO1 when it is used as a frequency input).
-32768.000 … 1500.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
11.54 Freq out 1 actual value
Value of frequency output 1.
Displays the value of frequency output 1 after scaling in Hz (via DIO2 when it is used as a
frequency output).
See 11.58 Freq out 1 src min.
0 … 16000 - Hz 1=1 y n Signal
11.55 Freq out 1 source
Parameters

122
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Source for frequency output 1.
Selects a signal / parameter to be connected to frequency output 1 (via DIO2 when it is used as
a frequency output).
0: Zero; output not in use.
0…0 Zero - 1=1 n y Parameter
11.58 Freq out 1 src min
Internal value corresponding to minimum value of frequency output 1.
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the minimum frequency of frequency output 1 (via
DIO2 when it is used as a frequency output).
Scaling parameters 11.58 and 11.59 set the low and high internal limits that corresponds to the
frequency output values in Hz defined by parameters 11.60 and 11.61:
Setting parameter 11.58 as maximum value and parameter 11.59 as minimum value inverts the
output:
-32768.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter

32767.000
11.59 Freq out 1 src max
Internal value corresponding to maximum value of frequency output 1.
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the maximum frequency of frequency output 1 (via
DIO2 when it is used as a frequency output).
-32768.000 … 1500.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
11.60 Freq out 1 at src min
Minimum value of frequency output 1.
Defines the minimum frequency of frequency output 1 in Hz (via DIO2 when it is used as a
frequency output).
Parameters

123
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0 … 16000 0 Hz 1=1 n y Parameter
11.61 Freq out 1 at src max
Maximum value of frequency output 1.
Defines the maximum frequency of frequency output 1 in Hz (via DIO2 when it is used as a
frequency output).
0 … 16000 16000 Hz 1=1 n y Parameter
Group 12 Standard AI
Configuration of standard analog inputs.
Index Name
Text
Range Default Unit Scale / Volatil Change - Type
Fbeq16 e running
12.03 AI supervision function
Supervision function analog inputs.
Selects how the unit reacts when AI1 … AI3 signals move out of the minimum and / or maximum
limits specified for the input.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by 12.04 AI supervision selection.
0: No action; no action taken.
1: Fault; the unit trips on 0x5551 AI supervision.
2: Warning; the unit generates 0x1127 AI supervision warning.
0…2 No action - 1=1 n y Parameter
12.04 AI supervision selection
Activation of analog input supervision.
Specifies which limits of AI1 … AI3 are supervised by12.03 AI supervision function:
Bit Name High Low

0 AI1 < MIN Minimum limit supervision of AI1 active. No action
1 AI1 > MAX Maximum limit supervision of AI1 active. No action
6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15
The supervision applies a margin of 1.0 V or 2.0 mA, see12.15 AI1 unit selection, to the limits.
Examples:
 12.18 AI1 max = 7.000 V, then the maximum limit supervision activates at 8.000 V.
 12.17 AI1 min = 4.000 mA, then the minimum limit supervision activates at 2.000 mA.
0000h … FFFFh 0000h - 1=1 n y Parameter
12.11 AI1 actual value
Value of analog input AI1.
Displays the value of AI1 in mA or V corresponding to the setting of jumper J1 (see chapter
Jumpers and switches of this manual).
-22.000 … 22.000 or - mA or V 1 = 0.001 y n Signal
-11.000 … 11.000
12.12 AI1 scaled value
Scaled value of analog input AI1.
Displays the value of AI1 after scaling.
See 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min and 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max.
Parameters

124
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 e running
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
12.14 AI1 offset
Offset for analog input AI1.
Adds an offset to 12.11 AI1 actual value.
-0.100 … 0.100 0.000 mA or V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
12.15 AI1 unit selection
Unit selection of analog input AI1.
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to AI1. Set to either mA or V corresponding to
the setting of jumper J1 (see chapter Jumpers and switches of this manual).
Note: Control board reboot, either by cycling the power or through 96.08 Control board boot, is
required to validate any changes in the hardware settings.
2: V; volts.
10: mA; milli amperes.
2 … 10 V mA or V 1=1 n y Parameter
12.16 AI1 filter time
Filter time constant of analog input AI1.
Defines the filter time constant for AI1.
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )
I = filter input (s tep)

O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time c onstant
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the analog input hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time
constant). This cannot be changed by any parameter.
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
12.17 AI1 min
Minimum value of analog input AI1.
Defines the minimum input value for AI1 in mA or V.
The default input for the reference is AI1. This is controlled by the parameters in groups 22, 24
and 26.
Parameters 12.17 and 12.18 set the low and high limit of the analog input signal in mA or V.
follows:
Parameters

125
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 e running
-22.000 … 22.000 or -20.000 or mA or V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter

-11.000 … 11.000 -10.000
12.18 AI1 max
Maximum value of analog input AI1.
Defines the maximum input value for AI1 in mA or V.
See 12.17 AI1 min.
-22.000 … 22.000 or 20.000 or mA or V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
-11.000 … 11.000 10.000
12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min
Internal value corresponding to minimum analog input AI1 value.
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the minimum AI1 value defined by 12.17 AI1 min.
Changing the polarity settings of 12.19 and 12.20 can effectively invert the analog input.
See 12.17 AI1 min.
-32768.000 … -100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max
Internal value corresponding to maximum analog input AI1 value.
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the maximum AI1 value defined by 12.18 AI1
max.
See 12.17 AI1 min.
-32768.000 … 100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
Displays the value of AI2 in mA or V corresponding to the setting of jumper J2 (see chapter
-11,000 … 11,000
Displays the value of analog input AI2 after scaling.
See parameters 12.29 AI2 scaled at AI2 min and 12.30 AI2 scaled at AI2 max.
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
12.24 AI2 offset
Parameters

126
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 e running
-0.100 … 0.100 0.000 mA or V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Note: Control board reboot, either by cycling the power or through 96.08 Control board boot, is
2: V; volts.
See 12.16 AI1 filter time.
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
12.27 AI2 min
Defines the minimum input value for analog input AI2 in mA or V.
follows:

-11,000 … 11,000 -10.000
12.28 AI2 max
Defines the maximum input value for AI2 in mA or V.
See 12.27 AI2 min.
-11,000 … 11,000 10.000
See 12.27 AI2 min.
-32768.000 … -100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
Parameters

127
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 e running
max.
See 12.27 AI2 min.
-32768.000 … 100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
Displays the value of AI3 in V.
-11.000 … 11.000 - V 1 = 0.001 y n Signal
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
12.34 AI3 offset
-0.100 … 0.100 0.000 V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI3.
See 12.16 AI1 filter time.
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
12.37 AI3 min
Defines the minimum input value for AI3 in V.
Parameters 12.37 and 12.38 set the low and high limit of the analog input signal in V. Scaling
parameters 12.39 and 12.40 define the internal values that correspond to these limits as follows:
-11.000 … 11.000 -10.000 V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter

12.38 AI3 max
Defines the maximum input value for AI3 in V.
See 12.37 AI3 min.
-11.000 … 11.000 10.000 V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Parameters

128
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 e running
See 12.37 AI3 min.
-32768.000 … -100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the maximum AI3 value defined by 12.38 AI3 max.
See 12.37 AI3 min.
-32768.000 … 100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
Group 13 Standard AO
Configuration of standard analog outputs.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
13.11 AO1 actual value
Value of analog output AO1.
Displays the value of AO1 in mA or V corresponding to the setting of jumper J5 (see chapter
0.000 … 22.000 or - mA or V 1 = 0.001 y n Signal
-10,000 … 10,000
13.12 AO1 source
Source for analog output AO1.
Selects a signal / parameter to be connected to AO1. Alternatively, sets the output to excitation
mode to feed a constant current to a temperature sensor.
0: Zero; none.
37: AO1 data storage; see 13.91 AO1 data storage.
0 … 38 Zero - 1=1 n y Parameter
13.15 AO1 unit selection
Unit selection of analog output AO1.
Selects the unit for readings and settings related to AO1. Set to either mA or V corresponding to
2: V; volts.
13.16 AO1 filter time
Filter time constant of analog output AO1.
Defines the filter time constant for AO1.
Parameters

129
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter

13.17 AO1 source min
Internal value corresponding to minimum analog output AO1 value.
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the minimum required AO1 value.
analog output values in mA or V defined by parameters 13.19 and 13.20:
Setting parameter 13.17 as maximum value and parameter 13.18 as minimum value inverts the
output:
Parameters

130
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32768.0 … 32767.0 -100.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter

13.18 AO1 source max
Internal value corresponding to maximum analog output AO1 value.
Defines the internal value that corresponds to the maximum required AO1 value.
See 13.17 AO1 source min.
-32768.0 … 32767.0 100.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
13.19 AO1 out at AO1 src min
Minimum analog output AO1 value.
Defines the minimum output value for AO1 in mA or V.
0.000 … 22.000 or 0.000 or mA or V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
-10,000 … 10,000 -10.000
13.20 AO1 out at AO1 src max
Maximum analog output AO1 value.
Defines the maximum output value for AO1 in mA or V.
0.000 … 22.000 or 20.000 or mA or V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
-10,000 … 10,000 10.000
Displays the value of AO2 in V.
-10.000 … 10.000 - V 1 = 0.001 y n Signal
13.22 AO2 source
See 13.12 AO1 source.
See 13.16 AO1 filter time.
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
analog output values in V defined by parameters 13.29 and 13.30:
Parameters

131
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Setting parameter 13.27 as maximum value and 13.28 as minimum value inverts the output:
-32768.0 … 32767.0 -100.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter

-32768.0 … 32767.0 100.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Defines the minimum output value for AO2 in V.
-10.000 … 10.000 -10.000 V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Defines the maximum output value for AO2 in V.
-10.000 … 10.000 10.000 V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
13.91 AO1 data storage
Storage parameter for analog output AO1.
Storage parameter to set analog output AO1 via e.g. a fieldbus.
To set analog output AO1 send a value e.g. via Modbus I/O data (see 58.101 Data I/O 1 …
58.124 Data I/O 24).
Example:
58.101 Data I/O 1 = AO1 data storage and 13.12 AO1 source = AO1 data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 0.00 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
13.92 AO2 data storage
Storage parameter for analog output AO2.
Parameters

132
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Storage parameter to set analog output AO2 via e.g. a fieldbus.
To set analog output AO2 send a value e.g. via Modbus I/O data (see 58.101 Data I/O 1 …
58.124 Data I/O 24).
Example:
58.101 Data I/O 1 = AO2 data storage and 13.22 AO2 source = AO2 data storage.
-327.68 … 327.67 0.00 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Group 14 I/O extension module 1

Configuration of I/O extension module 1.
Note: The contents of the parameter group varies according to the selected I/O extension module type.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
14.01 Module 1 type
First I/O extension module.
Activates (and specifies the type of) I/O extension module 1.
0: None; inactive.
1: FIO-01; adds 4 DIO and 2 RO.
2: FIO-11; adds 2 DIO, 3 AI and 1 AO.
4: FAIO-01; adds 2 AI and 2 AO.
0…4 None - 1=1 n n Parameter
14.02 Module 1 location
First I/O extension module location.
Activates and specifies the slot (1…3) on the unit’s control board into which the I/O extension
module 1 is installed. Alternatively, specifies the node ID of the slot on a FEA-0x extension
module.
1: Slot1; I/O extension module 1 is located in Slot1.
4 … 254: Node ID of the slot on the FEA-0x extension module.
1 … 254 Slot1 - 1=1 n n Parameter
14.03 Module 1 status
First I/O extension module status.
0: No option; no module detected in the specified slot.
1: No communication; a module has been detected but cannot be communicated with.
2: Unknown; the module type is unknown.
15: FIO-01; a FIO-01 has been detected and is active.
24: FAIO-01; a FAIO-01 has been detected and is active.
0 … 24 - - 1=1 y n Signal
14.05 DIO status
Status of digital input / outputs.
(Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11).
Displays the status of DIO1 … DIO2 / DIO4 on the extension module. The activation /
deactivation delays (if any are specified) are ignored.
Bit 0 indicates the status of DIO1.
Note: The number of active bits in this parameter depends on the number of digital input /
outputs on the extension module.
Example: 0000000000001001b = DIO1 and DIO4 are on, remainder are off:
Bit Name High Low

0 DIO1 On Off
1 DIO2 On Off
Parameters

133
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2 DIO3 On Off
3 DIO4 On Off
4 … 15 Bit 4 … 15

14.06 DIO delayed status
Delayed status of digital input / outputs.
(Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11).
Displays the delayed status of DIO1 … DIO2 / DIO4 on the extension module. This word is
updated only after activation / deactivation delays (if any are specified).
Bit 0 indicates the status of DIO1.
Note: The number of active bits in this parameter depends on the number of digital input /
outputs on the extension module.
Example: 000000000000001001b = DIO1 and DIO4 are on, remainder are off:
Bit Name High Low

0 DIO1 On Off
1 DIO2 On Off
2 DIO3 On Off
3 DIO4 On Off
4 … 15 Bit 4 … 15

14.09 DIO1 function
(Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-01 or FIO-11)
Selects whether DIO1 of the extension module is used as a digital input or output.
0…1 Input - 1=1 n y Parameter
14.10 DIO1 filter gain
Filter time constant of digital input / output DIO1.
(Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11)
Determines a filter time for DIO1 when it is used as an input.
0: 7.5 μs; 7.5 microseconds.
1: 195 μs; 195 microseconds.
3: 4.680 ms; 4.680 milliseconds.
0…3 7.5 μs μs or 1 = 1 n y Parameter
ms
Selects a signal / parameter bit to be connected to DIO1 of the extension module when
parameter 14.09 DIO1 function = Output.
0: Not energized; output is off.
1: Energized; output is on.
Parameters

134
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
energized
14.12 DIO1 ON delay
Defines the activation delay for DIO1.
tOn = 14.12 DIO1 ON delay

tOff = 14.13 DIO1 OFF delay
*Electrical status of DIO (in input mode) or status of selected source (in output mode). Indicated
by 14.05 DIO status.
**Indicated by 14.06 DIO delayed status.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Defines the deactivation delay for DIO1.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
14.14 DIO2 function
14.15 DIO2 filter gain
Filter time constant of digital input / output DIO2.
Determines a filter time for DIO2 when it is used as an input.
0: 7.5 μs; 7.5 microseconds.
0…3 7.5 μs μs or 1 = 1 n y Parameter
ms
Output.
Parameters

135
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
energized
14.17 DIO2 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
14.19 DIO3 function
14.19 AI supervision function
Supervision function analog inputs.
(Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FIO-11 or FAIO-01)
Selects how the unit reacts when AI1 … AI2 / AI3 signals move out of the minimum and / or
maximum limits specified for the input.
The inputs and the limits to be observed are selected by parameter 14.20 AI supervision
selection.
1: Fault; the unit trips on 80A0 AI supervision.
2: Warning; the unit generates an A8A0 AI supervision warning.
14.20 AI supervision selection
Activation of analog input supervision.
Specifies which limits of AI1 … AI2 / AI3 are supervised by 14.19 AI supervision function:
Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15
The supervision applies a margin of 1.0 V or 2.0 mA, see14.30 AI1 unit selection, to the limits.
Examples:
14.34 AI1 max = 7.000 V, then the maximum limit supervision activates at 8.000 V.
14.33 AI1 min = 4.000 mA, then the minimum limit supervision activates at 2.000 mA.
Parameters

136
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Selects a signal / parameter bit to be connected to DIO3 when 14.19 DIO3 function = Output.
energized
14.22 DIO3 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
14.22 AI force selection
Forced values selector for analog inputs.
The true readings of AI1 … AI2 / AI3 can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A forced value
parameter (see table below) is provided for each analog input and its value is applied whenever
the corresponding bit in 14.22 AI force selection is 1:
Bit Name High Low

0 AI1 Force AI1 to value of 14.28 AI1 force data. No action
1 AI2 Force AI2 to value of 14.43 AI2 force data. No action
2 AI3 Force AI3 to value of 14.58 AI3 force data (FIO-11 No action
only).
3 … 15 Bit 3 … 15

Deactivation delay for DIO3.
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
14.24 DIO4 function
Selects a signal / parameter bit to be connected to DIO4 when 14.24 DIO4 function = Output.
energized
Displays the value of AI1 in mA or V (depending on whether the input is set to current or
voltage).
-11.000 … 11.000
14.27 DIO4 ON delay
Parameters

137
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
14.28 AI1 force data
Forced value of analog input AI1.
Forced value that can be used instead of the true reading of the input.
See 14.22 AI force selection.
-22.000 … 22.000 or 0.000 mA or V 1 = 0.001 y y Parameter
-11.000 … 11.000
14.29 AI1 HW switch position
Unit selection switch of analog input AI1.
Shows the position of the hardware current / voltage selector on the I/O extension module.
Note: The setting of the current / voltage selector must match the unit selection made in 14.30
AI1 unit selection. I/O module reboot, either by cycling the power or through 96.08 Control board
boot, is required to validate any changes in the hardware settings.
2: V; volts.
2 … 10 - mA or V 1 = 1 y n Signal
the setting of the I/O extension module (see manual of the I/O extension module). The hardware
setting is also shown in 14.29 AI1 HW switch position.
Note: I/O module reboot, either by cycling the power or through 96.08 Control board boot, is
2: V; volts.
2 … 10 mA mA or V 1 = 1 n y Parameter
14.31 RO status
Status of relay outputs.
Status of RO1 … RO2 on the I/O extension module.
Example: 0000000000000001b = RO1 is energized, RO2 is de-energized.
Bit Name High Low

Parameters

138
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2 … 15 Bit 2 … 15

14.31 AI1 filter gain
Hardware filter time constant of analog input AI1.
Selects a hardware filter time for AI1.
See also 14.32 AI1 filter time.
0: No filtering; no filtering.
4: 1 ms; 1 millisecond.
5: 2 ms; 2 milliseconds.
0…7 No filtering μs or ms 1 = 1 n y Parameter
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the analog input hardware. See 14.31 AI1 filter gain.
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
14.33 AI1 min
Defines the minimum value for analog input AI1 in mA or V.
follows:
Parameters

139
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running

-11.000 … 11.000 -10.000
14.34 RO1 source
energized
14.34 AI1 max
Defines the maximum value for AI1 in mA or V.
See 14.33 AI1 min.
-11.000 … 11.000 10.000
14.35 RO1 ON delay
tOn = 14.35 RO1 ON delay

tOff = 14.36 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Parameters

140
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
See 14.33 AI1 min.
-32768.000 … -100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
14.36 RO1 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
max.
See 14.33 AI1 min.
-32768.000 … 100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
14.37 RO2 source
energized
14.38 RO2 ON delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
14.39 RO2 OFF delay
0.0 … 3000.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
voltage).
-11.000 … 11.000
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
Parameters

141
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-11.000 … 11.000
2: V; volts.
2 … 10 - mA or V 1 = 1 y n Signal
the setting of the I/O extension module (see the manual of the I/O extension module). The
hardware setting is also shown in 14.44 AI2 HW switch position.
2: V; volts.
3:.500 μs; 500 microseconds.
Parameters

142
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
14.48 AI2 min
Defines the minimum value for AI2 in mA or V.
follows:

-11.000 … 11.000 -10.000
14.49 AI2 max
Defines the maximum value for AI2 in mA or V
See 14.48 AI2 min.
-11.000 … 11.000 10.000
Parameters

143
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
See 14.48 AI2 min.
-32768.000 … -100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
max.
See 14.48 AI2 min.
-32768.000 … 100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
voltage).
-11.000 … 11.000
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
-11.000 … 11.000
2: V; volts.
10: mA; milli amperes
2 … 10 - mA or V 1 = 1 y n Signal
the setting of the I/O extension module (see manual of the I/O extension module). The hardware
setting is also shown in 14.59 AI3 HW switch position.
2: V; volts.
Parameters

144
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
14.63 AI3 min
Defines the minimum value for AI3 mA or V.
follows:
Parameters

145
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running

-11.000 … 11.000 -10.000
14.64 AI3 max
Defines the maximum value for AI3 in mA or V
See 14.63 AI3 min.
-11.000 … 11.000 10.000
See 14.63 AI3 min.
-32768.000 … -100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
max.
See 14.63 AI3 min.
-32768.000 … 100.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.000
14.71 AO force selection
Forced values selector for analog outputs.
The value of AO1 … AO1 / AO2 can be overridden for e.g. testing purposes. A forced value
parameter (see table below) is provided for each analog output and its value is applied
whenever the corresponding bit in 14.71 AO fore selection is 1:
Bit Name High Low

0 AO1 Force AO1 to value of 14.78 AO1 force data. No action
1 AO2 Force AO2 to value of 14.88 AO2 force data (FAIO- No action
01 only).
2 … 15 Bit 2 … 15
Parameters

146
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0000h … FFFFh 0000h - y 1=1 yParameter
Displays the value of AO1 in mA.
0.000 … 22.000 - mA 1 = 0.001 y n Signal
14.77 AO1 source
0: Zero; none.
14.78 AO1 force data
Forced value of analog output AO1.
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output signal.
See 14.71 AO force selection.
0.000 … 22.000 0.000 mA 1 = 0.001 y y Parameter
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter

analog output values in mA defined by parameters 14.82 and 14.83:
Parameters

147
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32768.0 … 32767.0 0.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter

-32768.0 … 32767.0 100.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Defines the minimum output value for AO1 in mA.
0.000 … 22.000 0.000 mA 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Defines the maximum output value for AO1 in mA.
0.000 … 22.000 20.000 mA 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
14.86 AO2 actual
(Visible when 14.01 Module 1 type = FAIO-01)
Displays the value of AO2 in mA.
0.000 … 22.000 - mA 1 = 0.001 y n Signal
14.87 AO2 source
Parameters

148
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
See 14.77 AO1 source.
14.88 AO2 force data
Forced value of analog output AO2.
Forced value that can be used instead of the selected output signal.
See 14.71 AO force selection.
0.000 … 22.000 0.000 mA 1 = 0.001 y y Parameter
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.000 … 30.000 0.100 s 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter

Internal signal value corresponding to minimum analog output AO2 value.
analog output values in mA defined by parameters 14.92 and 14.93:
Parameters

149
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32768.0 … 32767.0 0.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter

-32768.0 … 32767.0 100.0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Defines the minimum output value for AO2.
0.000 … 22.000 0.000 mA 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Defines the maximum output value for AO2.
0.000 … 22.000 20.000 mA 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
Parameters

150

Note: The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I/O extension module type.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
15.01 Module 2 type
Second I/O extension module.
0: None; inactive.
2: FIO-11; adds 2 DIO, 3 AI, 1 AO.
Second I/O extension module location.
module.
1: Slot1; I/O extension module 1.is located in Slot1.
4 … 254; Node ID of the slot on the FEA-0x extension module.
Second I/O extension module status.
0 … 24 - - 1=1 y n Signal
15.05 … See corresponding signal / parameter in Group 14 I/O extension module 1.
15.93
See corresponding signal / parameter in Group 14 I/O extension module 1.

Note: The contents of the parameter group vary according to the selected I/O extension module type.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
16.01 Module 3 type
3rd I/O extension module.
0: None; inactive.
2: FIO-11; adds 2 DIO, 3 AI, 1 AO.
3rd I/O extension module location.
Parameters

151
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
module.
4 … 254; Node ID of the slot on the FEA-0x extension module.
3rd I/O extension module status.
0 … 24 - 1=1 y n Signal
16.05 … See corresponding signal / parameter in Group 14 I/O extension module 1.
16.93
See corresponding signal / parameter in Group 14 I/O extension module 1.
Group 19 Start/Stop Mode

Selection of local and external control locations and operating modes.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Control locations:
Parameters

152
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Parameters

153
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 1 state machine:
State machines of leg 2 and leg 3 see appendix.

19.01 Leg 1 Enable Local I/O
Source for leg 1 enable command.
0: Open; 0.
1: Close; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
Parameters

154
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
21: Mains ON; automatically enables the unit when mains voltage is present.
0 … 21 DI1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
19.02 Leg 1 Run Local I/O
Source for leg 1 run command.
0: Open; 0.
1: Close; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
21: Auto reference; see 19.46 Leg 1 Auto reference ON level
See 19.01 Leg 1 Enable Local I/O.
See 19.02 Leg 1 Run Local I/O and 19.47 Leg 2 Auto reference ON level.
See 19.01 Leg 1 Enable Local I/O.
See 19.02 Leg 1 Run Local I/O and 19.48 Leg 3 Auto reference ON level.
19.10 Leg 1 Command Location Selector
Switch to change the source for leg 1 enable and run commands from 06.01 Main Control Word
active to local I/O.
0: MCW 6.01; 0, always follow 06.01 Main Control Word active.
1: Hardware DI; 1, always follow local I/O, see 19.01 & 19.02, 19.03 & 19.04, 19.05 & 19.06.
3: DI1; 0, follow 06.01 Main Control Word active. 1, follow local I/O.
11: DIO1; 0, follow 06.01 Main Control Word active. 1, follow local I/O.
12: DIO2; 0, follow 06.01 Main Control Word active. 1, follow local I/O.
19: DIL; 0, follow 06.01 Main Control Word active. 1, follow local I/O.
Parameters

155
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0 … 19 Hardware - 1=1 n y Parameter
DI
Switch to change the source for leg 2 enable and run commands from Main Control Word to
local I/O.
See 19.10 Leg 1 Command Location Selector.
DI
Switch to change the source for leg 3 enable and run commands from Main Control Word to
local I/O.
See 19.10 Leg 1 Command Location Selector.
DI
19.15 Reset
Source for the external fault reset signal.
0: Open; 0.
1: Close; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
19.17 Local control disable
Enables / Disables the local control via control panel and PC tool.
Enables / Disables local control (start and stop buttons of the control panel and the local controls
of the PC tool).
WARNING!
Before disabling local control, ensure that the control panel is not needed for stopping the unit.
0: No; enable local control.
1: Yes; disable local control.
0…1 No - 1=1 n y Parameter
19.20 3 Phase Sequence
Only for 3 phase systems.
Defines whether the unit starts operation with the next phase zero crossing or at the next zero
crossing of phase U.
0: Start Stop: Any order; starts with zero crossing of any phase U, V or W.
1: Start: U Stop: W; starts with zero crossing of phase U, stops with zero crossing of phase W.
0…1 Start Stop - 1=1 n y Parameter
19.21 Auto Reset Retries
Defines the number of attempts the power controller tries to reset a fault automatically. In case
of setting 0, no auto reset is performed.
0 … 10 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
19.22 Auto Reset Time
Defines the delay time from occurrence of a fault until the power controller tries to reset the fault
automatically.
0.0 … 10.0 1.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
19.23 Auto Reset Leg 1 Events
Parameters

156
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Defines which leg 1 events are affected by auto reset.
Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

19.26 Auto Reset Leg 1 Load Events
Defines which leg 1 load events are affected by auto reset.
Bit Name High Low

2 Partial Load short circuit Active Inactive
3 Load overload Active Inactive
4 Load aging Active Inactive
5 Load current imbalance Active Inactive
6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15
Parameters

157
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

Bit Name High Low

6 … 15 Bit 6 … 15

19.29 Auto Reset External Events
Defines which external events are affected by auto reset.
Bit Name High Low

5 … 15 Bit 5 … 15

19.30 Common Control Selector
Selects, whether each leg is operating independent or all legs are reacting to leg 1 enable and
run commands.
0: Separate
1: Follow Leg 1
0…1 Separate - 1=1 n y Parameter
19.35 Panel / Tool Control Selector
Selects which leg is reacting to the control from control panel / PC tool.
0: None; inactive.
1: Leg 1;
Parameters

158
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2: Leg 2;
3: Leg 3;
4: All;
0…4 All - 1=1 n y Parameter
19.40 Leg 1 Phase Angle Ramps Enable
Enables the phase angle ramps of leg 1. In disabled condition, the outputs of the ramps are
forced to zero.
0: Disable; 0.
1: Enable; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
21: Leg 1 Operating 6.14.04;
0 … 21 Leg 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Operating
6.14.04
forced to zero.
0: Disable; 0.
1: Enable; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
Operating
6.15.04
forced to zero.
0: Disable; 0.
1: Enable; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
Parameters

159
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
Operating
6.16.04
19.46 Leg 1 Auto reference ON level
Automatic run command generation for leg 1.
19.02 Leg 1 Run Local I/O = Auto reference is active, if 23.01 Leg 1 Main Ref (22.11) is greater
than 19.46 Leg 1 Auto reference ON level.
0.00 … 325.00 10.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 10.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 10.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Group 21 General References

Includes fix-, external references and motor potentiometer settings.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
21.01 Fix reference 1
Fix reference 1. Selection see groups 22, 24 and 26.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Note: Can only be selected using Other.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
21.11 Ext reference 1
External reference 1. Selection see groups 22, 24 and 26.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Parameters

160
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
21.71 Motor potentiometer function
Activates and selects the mode of the motor potentiometer.
0: Disable; disable the motor potentiometer and set its value to 0.
1: Enable (initialization at stop/power-up); the motor potentiometer first adopts the value set by
21.72 Motor potentiometer initial value. When the unit is operating, see 06.13 Global Status
Word bit 3 = 1, the value can be adjusted from the up and down sources defined by 21.73 Motor
potentiometer up source and 21.74 Motor potentiometer down source.
Stopping (disabling) the unit, see 6.13 Global Status Word bit 2 = 0, or a power cycle will reset
the motor potentiometer to the initial value set by 21.72 Motor potentiometer initial value.
2: Enable (resume always); function see Enable (initialization at stop/power-up), but the motor
potentiometer value is retained over a stop or a power cycle.
0…2 Disable - 1=1 n y Parameter
21.72 Motor potentiometer initial value
Initial value for motor potentiometer.
Defines an initial value (starting point) for the motor potentiometer.
See 21.71 Motor potentiometer function.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
21.73 Motor potentiometer up source
Selects the source for motor potentiometer up signal.
0: Disable; 0, no change, hold the motor potentiometer value.
1: Enable; 1, increase the motor potentiometer value (if both the up and down sources are on,
the potentiometer value will not change).
3: DI1; uses 10.02 DI delayed status bit 0.
11: DIO1; uses 11.02 DIO delayed status bit 0.
19: DIL; uses 10.02 DI delayed status bit 15.
0 … 19 Disable - 1=1 n y Parameter
21.74 Motor potentiometer down source
Selects the source for motor potentiometer down signal.
0: Disable; 0, no change, hold the motor potentiometer value.
Parameters

161
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
1: Enable; 1, decrease the motor potentiometer value (if both the up and down sources are on,
the potentiometer value will not change).
21: DI1 + Stop; DI1 = 1 or stop command active  the motor potentiometer value is decreased,
0 = the motor potentiometer value is held.
29: DIO1 + Stop; DIO1 = 1 or stop command active  the motor potentiometer value is
decreased, 0 = the motor potentiometer value is held.
30: DIO2 + Stop; DIO2 = 1 or stop command active  the motor potentiometer value is
decreased, 0 = the motor potentiometer value is held.
37: DIL + Stop; DIL = 1 or stop command active  the motor potentiometer value is decreased,
21.75 Motor potentiometer ramp time
Motor potentiometer change time.
Defines the change rate of the motor potentiometer. This is the time required for the motor
potentiometer to change from 21.76 Motor potentiometer min value to 21.77 Motor
potentiometer max value. The same change rate applies in both directions (up and down).
0.0 … 3000.0 10.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
21.76 Motor potentiometer min value
Motor potentiometer minimum.
Defines the minimum value of the motor potentiometer in percent of nominal load current, load
voltage or load power.
See 99.02 Load Current, 99.03 Load Voltage and 99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
21.77 Motor potentiometer max value
Motor potentiometer maximum.
Defines the maximum value of the motor potentiometer in percent of nominal load current, load
0.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
21.80 Motor potentiometer ref act
Value of the motor potentiometer.
Displays the output of the motor potentiometer function in percent of nominal load current, load
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Parameters

162
Group 22 Leg 1 Reference Chain

Leg 1 reference source selection.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 1 reference chain:
22.01 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref

Main reference.
Leg 1 channel A main reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.02 Leg 1 Cha A Auxiliary Ref
Auxiliary reference.
Leg 1 channel A auxiliary reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load
power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.03 Leg 1 Cha A Sum Ref
Sum of main and auxiliary references.
Leg 1 channel A sum of main and auxiliary references in percent of nominal load current, load
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.04 Leg 1 Cha A Sum Ref after limit
Sum reference after limit.
Leg 1 channel A sum reference after applying limits 22.21 Leg 1 Cha A Max and 22.22 Leg 1
Cha A Min in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load power.
Parameters

163
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.05 Leg 1 Cha B Main Ref
Main reference.
Leg 1 channel B main reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.06 Leg 1 Cha B Auxiliary Ref
Auxiliary reference.
Leg 1 channel B auxiliary reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load
power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.07 Leg 1 Cha B Sum Ref
Sum of main and auxiliary references.
Leg 1 channel B sum of main and auxiliary references in percent of nominal load current, load
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.08 Leg 1 Cha B Sum Ref after limit
Sum reference after limit.
Leg 1 channel B sum reference after applying limits 22.31 Leg 1 Cha B Max and 22.32 Leg 1
Cha B Min in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.09 Leg 1 Reference
Leg 1 general reference.
Leg 1 reference after 22.35 Leg 1 Cha A / Cha B Selector in percent of nominal load current,
load voltage or load power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.10 Leg 1 Panel Ref
Reference from control panel.
Leg 1 reference from control panel in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or load
power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref
Leg 1 final (actual) reference.
Leg 1 final (actual) reference after 22.37 Leg 1 Panel / Remote Selector in percent of nominal
load current, load voltage or load power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
22.15 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Selector
Source for main reference.
Selects the source for 22.01 Leg 1 Cha A Main ref.
0: Zero;
1: AI1 scaled (12.12);
2: AI2 scaled (12.22);
3: AI3 scaled (12.32);
4: FB A reference 1 (3.05);
5: FB A reference 2 (3.06);
7: Process PID 1 out 41.01;
Parameters

164
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
10: Fix reference 1 (21.01);
13: External reference 1 (21.11);
16: MF D2D ref1 (3.13);
17: MF D2D ref2 (3.14);
18: Motor poti ref (21.80);
0 … 18 AI1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
scaled
(12.12)
22.16 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Mux
On / Off main reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel A main reference switch.
0: Open; 0.
1: Close; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
0 … 19 Close - 1=1 n y Parameter
22.17 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Inversion
Direct / Inverted main reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel A main reference inversion switch (multiplication with -1).
0: Normal; 0.
1: Inverse; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
0 … 19 Normal - 1=1 n y Parameter
22.18 Leg 1 Cha A Auxiliary Ref Selector
Source for auxiliary reference.
Selects the source for 22.02 Leg 1 Cha A Auxiliary Ref.
See 22.15 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Selector.
22.19 Leg 1 Cha A Auxiliary Ref Mux
On / Off auxiliary reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel A auxiliary reference switch.
See 22.16 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Mux.
Parameters

165
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0 … 19 Open - 1=1 n y Parameter
22.20 Leg 1 Cha A Auxiliary Ref Inversion
Direct / Inverted auxiliary reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel A auxiliary reference inversion switch (multiplication with -
1).
See 22.17 Leg 1 Cha A Main Ref Inversion.
22.21 Leg 1 Cha A Max
Upper limit for sum reference.
Upper limit for leg 1 channel A sum reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or
load power.
0.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
22.22 Leg 1 Cha A Min
Lower limit for sum reference.
Lower limit for leg 1 channel A sum reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or
load power.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
22.25 Leg 1 Cha B Main Ref Selector
Source for main reference.
Selects the source for 22.05 Leg 1 Cha B Main ref.
0 … 18 Fix - 1=1 n y Parameter
reference
1 (21.01)
22.26 Leg 1 Cha B Main Ref Mux
On / Off main reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel B main reference switch.
0 … 19 Close - 1=1 n y Parameter
22.27 Leg 1 Cha B Main Ref Inversion
Direct / Inverted main reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel B main reference inversion switch (multiplication with -1).
22.28 Leg 1 Cha B Auxiliary Ref Selector
Source for auxiliary reference.
Selects the source for 22.06 Leg 1 Cha B Auxiliary Ref.
22.29 Leg 1 Cha B Auxiliary Ref Mux
On / Off auxiliary reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel B auxiliary reference switch.
0 … 19 Open - 1=1 n y Parameter
22.30 Leg 1 Cha B Auxiliary Ref Inversion
Direct / Inverted auxiliary reference.
Selects the operator for leg 1 channel B auxiliary reference inversion switch (multiplication with -
1).
22.31 Leg 1 Cha B Max
Upper limit for sum reference.
Parameters

166
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Upper limit for leg 1 channel B sum reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or
load power.
0.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
22.32 Leg 1 Cha B Min
Lower limit for sum reference.
Lower limit for leg 1 channel B sum reference in percent of nominal load current, load voltage or
load power.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
22.35 Leg 1 Cha A / Cha B Selector
Source for general reference.
Selects the source for 22.09 Leg 1 Reference. Low activates leg 1 channel A reference and high
activates leg 1 channel B reference.
0: Channel A; 0.
1: Channel B; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
0 … 19 Channel - 1=1 n y Parameter
A
22.37 Leg 1 Panel / Remote Selector
Source for final (actual) reference.
Selects the source for 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref. Low activates leg 1 general reference (reference
chain) and high activates the control panel reference.
0: Remote; 0.
1: Panel; 1.
2: Auto;
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
9: DI7;
10: DI8;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
0 … 19 Auto - 1=1 n y Parameter
Group 23 Leg 1 Control Detailed
Leg 1 control chain includes ramps, current / voltage / power control, control mode selector and limiters.
Parameters

167
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
23.01 Leg 1 Main Ref (22.11)
Main reference for leg 1 control chain from leg 1 reference chain.
See 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 control chain II:
23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle Variable Burst

Minimum on / off time for a full wave (burst) variable cycle.
Defines the minimum on / off time when 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full wave variable cycle (=
3). For reference values below or equal 50 %, it defines the minimum on time. For reference
values above 50 %, it defines the minimum off time.
1 … 6000 10 Period 1 = 1 n y Parameter
s
23.04 Leg 1 Burst Out
Alpha reference after leg 1 control mode.
Firing angle reference for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = full wave (burst) / half wave (= 1 … 4).
0.0 … 180.0 - ° 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
23.05 Leg 1 Burst Out after Current Limit
Alpha reference after limit.
Firing angle reference for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = full wave (burst) / half wave (= 1 … 4)
after the current limiter.
0.0 … 180.0 - ° 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
23.07 Leg 1 2nd mode switching control
Switching between control modes.
Parameters

168
Index Name
Text
Range Default Unit
Fbeq16 running
Switching between 1st control mode (see 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode) and 2nd control mode (see
23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode):
 Fix either 1st control mode or 2nd control mode.
 Automatic switching between 1st control mode and 2nd control mode by function 1
(preferred), function 2 or function 3:
U/I/P
100 %
23.08
23.09
0
t
2nd control mode

1st control mode (see 99.10) 1st control mode (see 99.10)
(see 23.10)
Change Indication 06.14 Leg 1 Status Word bit 14
 Remote switching between 1st control mode and 2nd control mode by bit (see 23.11 Leg 1
2nd mode control bit).
0: Use (99.10); 0, 1st control mode active (see 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode).
1: Use (23.10); 1, 2nd control mode active (see 23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode).
2: Function 1; automatic switching between 1st control mode and 2nd control mode, see table
below.
below.
below.
20: By bit (23.11); remote switching between 1st control mode and 2nd control mode, see table
below.
All in percent of 99.02 Load Current, 99.03 Load Voltage or 99.09 Load Power.
Switch from 1st control mode Switch from 2nd control mode
to 2nd control mode to 1st control mode
Function 1 Load voltage ≥ 23.08 Leg 1 2nd Load current ≥ 23.09 Leg 1 2nd mode
mode switching level 1 switching level 2
Function 2 Load voltage ≥ 23.08 Leg 1 2nd Load voltage ≤ 23.09 Leg 1 2nd mode
Function 3 Load current ≤ 23.08 Leg 1 2nd Load current ≥ 23.09 Leg 1 2nd mode
By bit (23.11) 01 10
Note: Switching between 1st control mode and 2nd control mode is usually used to start resistive
loads with high cold to hot ratios.
Parameters

169
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0 … 20 Use (99.10) - 1=1 n y Parameter
23.08 Leg 1 2nd mode switching level 1
Level for automatic switching between control modes.
First level for automatic switching between control modes set in 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode and
in 23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode, in percent of 99.02 Load Current, 99.03 Load Voltage or 99.09 Load
Power.
See 23.07 Leg 1 2nd mode switching control = 2 … 19.
0.00 … 325.00 95.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.09 Leg 1 2nd mode switching level 2
Level for automatic switching between control modes.
Second level for automatic switching between control modes set in 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode
and in 23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode, in percent of 99.02 Load Current, 99.03 Load Voltage or 99.09
Load Power.
See 23.07 Leg 1 2nd mode switching control = 2 … 19.
0.00 … 325.00 90.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode
2nd control mode.
Select the 2nd control mode.
0: Full wave logic ON/OFF; full wave is on (= 100 % load power) when 06.08 Used Main Control
Word bit 0 = 1. Full wave is off (= 0 % load power) when 06.08 Used Main Control Word bit 0 =
0.
1: Full wave fix cycle; full wave (burst) with fix cycle control. The load power depends on 22.11
Leg 1 Actual Ref.
2: Full wave variable cycle; full wave (burst) with variable cycle control. The load power depends
on 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
3: Half wave; half wave control. The load power depends on 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
0…3 Full wave fix - 1=1 n y Parameter
cycle
23.11 Leg 1 2nd mode control bit
Switching between control modes via a bit or a digital input.
Switching between control modes set in 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode and 23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode
via a bit or a digital input.
0: Disable; 0, the control mode set in 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode is relevant.
1: Enable; 1, the control mode set in 23.10 Leg 1 2nd mode is relevant.
2: Auto;
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
9: DI7;
10: DI8;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
Parameters

170
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 1 current control chain:
23.20 Leg 1 Current Control Ref 1

Current reference 1.
Leg 1 current reference after the square root block for I² control in percent of 99.02 Load
Current.
Valid when 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = I  control or I2  control (= 7 or 8).
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 current reference after applying 30.02 Leg 1 Current Limit Max and 30.03 Leg 1 Current
Limit Min in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 current reference after 99.16 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Start Ramp in percent of 99.02 Load
Current.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.23 Leg 1 Current Actual
Current actual.
Leg 1 actual current for the current controller in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.24 Leg 1 Current Control Delta
Current deviation.
Leg 1 delta current for the current controller in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.25 Leg 1 Current Control P-Gain
P-gain.
Leg 1 p-gain for the current controller.
0.000 … 100.000 0.300 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.26 Leg 1 Current Control I-Time
I-time.
Leg 1 i-time for the current controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.10 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.27 Leg 1 Current Control D-Time
D-time.
Leg 1 d-time for the current controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.28 Leg 1 Current Control D-Filter Time
D-filter time.
Parameters

171
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 1 d-filter time for the current controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.01 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.29 Leg 1 Current Control Out
Output current controller.
Leg 1 output of the current controller in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 voltage control chain:
23.35 Leg 1 Voltage Control Ref 1

Voltage reference 1.
Leg 1 voltage reference after the square root block for U² control in percent of 99.03 Load
Voltage.
Valid when 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = U  Open loop control, U2  Open loop control, U 
control or U2  control (= 5, 6, 9 or 10).
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 voltage reference after applying limits 30.21 Leg 1 Voltage Limit Max and 30.22 Leg 1
Voltage Limit Min in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 voltage reference after 99.16 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Start Ramp in percent of 99.03
Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.38 Leg 1 Voltage Actual
Voltage actual.
Leg 1 actual voltage for the voltage controller in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.39 Leg 1 Voltage Control Delta
Voltage deviation.
Leg 1 delta voltage for the voltage controller in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.40 Leg 1 Voltage Control P-Gain
P-gain.
Leg 1 p-gain for the voltage controller.
0.000 … 100.000 0.300 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.41 Leg 1 Voltage Control I-Time
Parameters

172
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
I-time.
Leg 1 i-time for the voltage controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.10 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.42 Leg 1 Voltage Control D-Time
D-time.
Leg 1 d-time for the voltage controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.43 Leg 1 Voltage Control D-Filter Time
D-filter time.
Leg 1 d-filter time for the voltage controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.01 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.44 Leg 1 Voltage Control Out
Output voltage controller.
Leg 1 output of the voltage controller in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.45 Leg 1 Voltage Control Out after Current Limit
Output voltage controller after limit.
Leg 1 output of the voltage controller after applying limit 30.20 Leg 1 Current Limit in percent of
99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.46 Leg 1 Voltage Control Out open loop
Voltage reference for open loop control after limit.
Leg 1 voltage reference for open loop control after applying limit 30.20 Leg 1 Current Limit in
percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Leg 1 power control chain:
23.50 Leg 1 Power Control Ref 1

Power reference 1.
Leg 1 power reference in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
Valid when 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = P  control (= 11).
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Power reference 2.
Leg 1 power reference after applying limits 30.31 Leg 1 Power Limit Max and 30.32 Leg 1
Power Limit Min in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
Power reference 3.
Leg 1 power reference after 99.16 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Start Ramp in percent of 99.09 Load
Power.
Parameters

173
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.53 Leg 1 Power Actual
Power actual.
Leg 1 actual power for the power controller in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.54 Leg 1 Power Control Delta
Power deviation.
Leg 1 delta power for the power controller in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.55 Leg 1 Power Control P-Gain
P-gain.
Leg 1 p-gain for the power controller.
0.000 … 100.000 0.300 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.56 Leg 1 Power Control I-Time
I-time.
Leg 1 i-time for the power controller
0.00 … 100.00 0.10 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.57 Leg 1 Power Control D-Time
D-time.
Leg 1 d-time for the power controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.58 Leg 1 Power Control D-Filter Time
D-filter time.
Leg 1 d-filter time for the power controller.
0.00 … 100.00 0.01 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
23.59 Leg 1 Power Control Out
Output power controller.
Leg 1 output of the power controller in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.60 Leg 1 Power Control Out after Current Limit
Output power controller after limit.
Leg 1 output of the power controller after applying limit 30.20 Leg 1 Current Limit in percent of
99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.65 Leg 1 External Ref
External reference.
Leg 1 external reference in percent:
0 %  180.0° and 100 %  0.0°.
Valid when 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Leg 1 External Ref 23.65 (= 12).
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 y y Parameter
23.70 Leg 1 Phase Angle Out
Final alpha reference for Leg 1.
Leg 1 final alpha reference in percent:
0 %  180.0° and 100 %  0.0°.
Valid for the phase angle controls. 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode =  controls / External Ref 23.65
(= 5 … 12).
0.00 … 100.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
23.75 Leg 1 External Voltage Feedback
Actual voltage measured by the overriding control system.
Leg 1 actual voltage measured by the overriding control system in percent of 99.03 Load
Voltage.
Valid when 99.64 Leg 1 Voltage Feedback = External (23.75).
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 y y Parameter
Parameters

174
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
23.77 Leg 1 External Current Feedback
Actual current measured by the overriding control system.
Leg 1 actual current measured by the overriding control system in percent of 99.02 Load
Current.
Valid when 99.74 Leg 1 Current Feedback = External (23.77).
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 y y Parameter
23.80 Leg 1 External Power Feedback
Actual power measured by the overriding control system.
Leg 1 actual power measured by the overriding control system in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
Valid when 99.84 Leg 1 Power Feedback = External (23.80).
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 y y Parameter
23.90 Leg 1 Firing Pulse Prolonging
Increasing the firing pulse train length.
Prolonging the duration of the firing pulse train e.g. for inductive loads.
0.0 … 95.0 0.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
23.95 Leg 1 Control Mode Options
23.95 Leg 1 Control mode options enables additional functions depending on 99.10 Leg 1
Control Mode:
Bit Name High Low Remark

0 Full wave half cycle Active Inactive Only for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode =
1 Fix cycle resolution Active Inactive Full wave fix cycle (= 2)
2 … 15
Full wave half cycle:

If active, 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full wave fix cycle (= 2) operates using half cycles instead
of full cycles.
Fix cycle resolution:
If active, the resolution of 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full wave fix cycle (= 2) is ‘increased’.
Due to the system, the best possible resolution is one full wave (one cycle). If the reference is
not inside this resolution, the remaining parts are added up and if they equal a full wave, the full
wave is conducted.

Description see group 22 Leg 1 Reference Chain.

Description see group 23 Leg 1 Control Detailed.

Description see group 22 Leg 1 Reference Chain.

Description see group 23 Leg 1 Control Detailed.
Group 28 Unit Faults

Configuration of external events, selection of behavior of the thyristor power controller upon fault situations.
Parameters

175
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
28.01 External event 1 source
External event 1.
Defines the source for external event 1. Detailed description in chapter Troubleshooting.
The External Event is low active, thus:
0 = Trigger event
1 = Normal operation.
See 28.02 External event 1 type.
0: Active; 0.
1: Inactive; 1.
3: DI1;
4: DI2;
5: DI3;
6: DI4;
7: DI5;
8: DI6;
11: DIO1;
12: DIO2;
19: DIL;
0 … 19 Inactive - 1=1 n y Parameter
28.02 External event 1 type
External event 1.
Selects the type of external event 1.
0: Fault; fault 0x5211 is generated.
1: Warning; warning 0x1201 is generated.
3: Warning/Fault; if the unit is operating, see 06.13 Global Status Word bit 3 = 1, fault 0x5211 is
generated. Otherwise, warning 0x1201 is generated.
0…3 Fault - 1=1 n y Parameter
External event 2.
Defines the source for external event 2.
See 28.01 External event 1 source.
External event 2.
External event 3.
External event 3.
Parameters

176
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
External event 4.
External event 4.
Selects the type for external event 4.
External event 5.
External event 5.
Selects the type for external event 5.
0…3 Fault 1=1 n y Parameter
28.20 Fault function Leg 2 / Leg 3
Follow fault function of leg 1.
Selects if faults overcurrent, mains overvoltage and mains undervoltage set up individually for
each leg or if all follow leg 1.
0: Follow Leg 1
1: Individual
0…1 Follow - 1=1 n y Parameter
Leg 1
28.21 Leg 1 Overcurrent Fault level
Leg 1 overcurrent.
Leg 1 overcurrent fault level in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
See description in chapter Troubleshooting.
0.00 … 325.00 150.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
28.22 Leg 1 Overcurrent Warning level
Leg 1 overcurrent.
Leg 1 overcurrent warning level in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 130.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Leg 2 overcurrent.
0.00 … 325.00 150.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Leg 2 overcurrent.
0.00 … 325.00 130.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Parameters

177
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 3 overcurrent.
0.00 … 325.00 150.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Leg 3 overcurrent.
0.00 … 325.00 130.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
28.30 Leg 1 Mains Overvoltage Fault level
Leg 1 mains overvoltage.
Leg 1 mains overvoltage fault level in percent of 99.01 Supply Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 150.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
28.31 Leg 1 Mains Overvoltage Warning level
Leg 1 mains overvoltage warning level in percent of 99.01 Supply Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 130.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 150.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 130.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 150.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 130.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
28.40 Leg 1 Mains Undervoltage short time Fault level
Leg 1 absolute minimum mains voltage.
Leg 1 mains undervoltage short time fault level in volts.
Notes:
 Do not set lower than 80.00 V.
 In case the mains contactor is controlled by the overriding control, it might be necessary to
suppress the short time mains undervoltage fault. For this set 19.01 Leg 1 Enable Local I/O =
Mains ON.
0.0 … 3250.0 80.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
28.41 Leg 1 Mains Undervoltage Fault level
Leg 1 mains undervoltage.
Leg 1 mains undervoltage fault level in percent of 99.01 Supply Voltage, delayed by 28.42 Leg 1
Mains Undervoltage Fault delay time.
Parameters

178
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.00 … 325.00 75.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
28.42 Leg 1 Mains Undervoltage Fault delay time
Leg 1 mains undervoltage fault delay time for 28.41 Leg 1 Mains Undervoltage Fault level.
0.0 … 3000.0 2.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
28.43 Leg 1 Mains Undervoltage Warning level
Leg 1 mains undervoltage warning level in percent of 99.01 Supply Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 90.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Notes:
Mains ON.
0.0 … 3250.0 80.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 75.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
0.0 … 3000.0 2.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 90.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Notes:
Mains ON.
0.0 … 3250.0 80.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 75.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Parameters

179
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.0 … 3000.0 2.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
0.00 … 325.00 90.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Group 29 Multitap
Configuration when using a transformer with multitaps. See DCT880 Multitap Control Manual 3ADW000440.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
29.01 Leg 1 Output Voltage relative
reserved
0.00 … 325.00 33.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
reserved
0.00 … 325.00 67.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
reserved
0.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Group 30 Leg 1 Limits

Thyristor power controller operation limits.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 1 limits:
Reference
I 30.01 Leg 1 Current

30.05
Limiter 30.01
30.07 2
30.09 0 0, 2 Current
30.02 Controller
30.02 1
30.11
30.13 30.03
U
30.04
30.06
30.08
30.10
30.12
Parameters

180
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
30.01 Leg 1 Current Limiter Mode
Leg 1 current limiter operation mode.
0: Fix; fixed limits. 30.02 Leg 1 Current Limit Max and 30.03 Leg 1 Current Limit Min are used.
1: Auto (current controller); uses value of 30.02 Leg 1 Current Limit Max as reference for the
current controller. This releases the current controller working as current limiter for 99.10 Leg 1
Control Mode = 1 … 6 and 9 … 12, when 30.20 Leg 1 Current Limiters = Enable.
2: By voltage; 30.02 Leg 1 Current Limit Max is set depending on the load voltage using
parameters 30.04 … 30.13.
0…2 Fix - 1=1 n y Parameter
30.02 Leg 1 Current Limit Max
Leg 1 upper current limit.
Leg 1 upper current limit in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 325.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.03 Leg 1 Current Limit Min
Leg 1 lower current limit.
Leg 1 lower current limit in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.04 Leg 1 Current Limit Voltage 1
Leg 1 voltage depending current limit.
First U axis-supporting point in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 20.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.05 Leg 1 Current Limit Level 1
First I axis-supporting point in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 20.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Second U axis-supporting point in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 40.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Second I axis-supporting point in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 40.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Third U axis-supporting point in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 60.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Third I axis-supporting point in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 60.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
4th U axis-supporting point in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 80.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
4th I axis-supporting point in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 80.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
5th U axis-supporting point in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Parameters

181
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
5th I axis-supporting point in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.15 Leg 1 Alpha min Current Controller
Output of current controller after the arccosine for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = full wave (burst) /
half wave (= 1 … 4).
See 30.20 Leg 1 Current Limit.
0.0 … 180.0 - ° 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
30.20 Leg 1 Current Limiters
Activates the current limiters for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = 1 … 6 and 9 … 12. This is all
control modes except I  control and I2  control (= 7 and 8).
0: Disable; the current limiters are disabled.
1: Enable; the current limiters are enabled.
0…1 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
30.21 Leg 1 Voltage Limit Max
Leg 1 upper voltage limit.
Leg 1 upper voltage limit in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 325.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.22 Leg 1 Voltage Limit Min
Leg 1 lower voltage limit.
Leg 1 lower voltage limit in percent of 99.03 Load Voltage.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.31 Leg 1 Power Limit Max
Leg 1 upper power limit.
Leg 1 upper power limit in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 325.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.32 Leg 1 Power Limit Min
Leg 1 lower power limit.
Leg 1 lower power limit in percent of 99.09 Load Power.
0.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
30.40 Leg 1 Alpha Min
Leg 1 minimum  limit.
Leg 1 minimum firing angle (thus maximum load voltage) in degrees.
0.0 … 180.0 0.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
30.41 Leg 1 Alpha Max
Leg 1 maximum  limit.
Leg 1 maximum firing angle (thus minimum load voltage)in degrees
0.0 … 180.0 180.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter

Description see Group 30 Leg 1 Limits.

Description see Group 30 Leg 1 Limits.
Group 33 Maintenance timer & counter

Configuration of maintenance timers / counters.
Parameters

182
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
33.01 … reserved
33.65
reserved
Group 35 Thermal Measurement

Temperature measurement channel 1 … 4 configuration.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Temperature measurement channel 1 overview:
35.01 Temp 1 Actual

Temperature measurement actual temperature.
Displays the actual temperature of channel 1 defined by 35.05 Temp 1 Conversion mode.
-50.0 … 2000.0 °C, - See 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
-60.0 … 4000.0 °F or 35.03
0.0 … 2300.0 K
35.02 Temp 1 Scaled
Temperature measurement scaled temperature.
Displays the scaled temperature value of channel 1 selected by 35.04 Temp 1 Source.
-32768.000 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
32767.000
35.03 Temp 1 Unit
Temperature measurement unit selection.
Defines the unit for signals / parameters 35.01, 35.06 and 35.07.
150: °C; degree Celsius.
151: °F; degree Fahrenheit.
152: K; Kelvin.
150 … 152 °C - 1=1 n y Parameter
35.04 Temp 1 Source
Temperature measurement source for the scaling.
Parameters

183
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Selects the source of temperature measurement channel 1 connected to the scaling.
Additionally the scaling of low and high limit from the chosen analog input signal are selected.
35.04 Temp 1 Source Scaling value / parameter for Scaling value / parameter for
the low limit the high limit
Other; source selection 0.000 100.000
0: Zero; output is set to zero 0.000 0.000
1: AI1 scaled (12.12) 12.19 AI1 scaled at AI1 min 12.20 AI1 scaled at AI1 max

35.05 Temp 1 Conversion mode
Temperature measurement conversion mode.
Selects the source of temperature measurement channel 1
0: Zero; output is set to zero.
1: Temp 1 scaled; temperature is selected by 35.04 Temp 1 Source and scaled via 35.06 Temp
1 Min and 35.07 Temp 1 Max.
35.06 Temp 1 Min
Temperature measurement minimum value.
Defines the minimum input value for the temperature measurement channel 1 in °C, °F or K,
depending on 35.03 Temp 1 Unit.
Scaling values / parameters, depending on setting of 35.04 Temp 1 Source (see table below),
set the low and high limit of the scaled temperature, the result can be seen in 35.02 Temp 1
Scaled.
35.04 Temp 1 Source Scaling value / parameter for Scaling value / parameter for
the low limit the high limit
Other; source selection 0.000 100.000
0: Zero; output is set to zero 0.000 0.000
Parameters 35.06 and 35.07 define the temperature values that correspond to these limits as
follows:
Parameters

184
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-50.0 … 2000.0 °C, 0.0 °C, See 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
-60.0 … 4000.0 °F or 32.0 °F or 35.03
0.0 … 2300.0 K 273.2 K
35.07 Temp 1 Max
Temperature measurement maximum value.
Defines the maximum input value for the temperature measurement channel 1 in °C, °F or K,
depending on 35.03 Temp 1 Unit.
See 35.06 Temp 1 min.
-50.0 … 2000.0 °C, 250.0 °C, See 1 = 0.1 y n Parameter
-60.0 … 4000.0 °F or 482.0 °F or 35.03
0.0 … 2300.0 K 523.2 K
35.08 Temp 1 Offset
reserved
0.000 … 0.000 0.000 V 1 = 0.001 n y Parameter
35.09 Temp 1 Measurement current
reserved
0.00 … 20.00 0.00 mA 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
35.21 … Temperature measurement channel 2.
35.29
See 35.01 Temp 1 Actual … 35.09 Temp 1 Measurement current.

35.49

35.69
Group 36 Leg 1 Load monitoring

Load resistance measurement, load loss function and overload function.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
36.01 Leg 1 Resistance actual
Leg 1 resistance.
Leg 1 calculated actual resistance. For the calculation, RMS load current and RMS load voltage
are used and adapted by 99.05 Load Configuration.
0.00 … 1000.00 - Ohm 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
36.02 3ph Resistance actual
3-phase resistance.
3-phase calculated actual resistance. For the calculation, all three RMS load currents and all
three RMS load voltages are used and adapted by 99.05 Load Configuration.
0.00 … 1000.00 - Ohm 1 = 0.1 y n Signal
36.10 Leg 1 Load Loss Function
Leg 1 load loss event.
Leg 1 load loss for e.g. defective loads, high ohmic loads.
The detection is based on RMS load current and RMS load voltage for the last positive or
negative half-wave of the mains voltage. In case of total load failure, still a load voltage is
measured, but the load current is equal or close to zero.
Parameters

185
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Note: This method might not indicate the failed load accurately for all load configurations (e.g.
closed delta configuration for 3-phase loads). Additional detection methods are not possible for
references close to 0.
0: No reaction; no action taken.
1: Warning; warning 2151 is generated.
2: Fault; fault 3151 is generated.
reaction
36.11 Leg 1 Load Loss activation time
Leg 1 load loss start time.
Time after the Run signal is given until Leg 1 load loss is activated.
0.01 … 300.00 1.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.12 Leg 1 Load Loss Current level
Leg 1 load loss current level.
Sets the current level in percent of 99.02 Load Current to activate leg 1 load loss function.
Current values greater than 36.12 Leg 1 Load Loss Current level activate the load loss function.
I
Imax
Supervised
area
36.12 Leg 1 Load

Loss Current level
α U
U=0 Umax
α = 180° α = 0°
36.13 Leg 1 Load

Loss Alpha level
0.00 … 325.00 10.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter

36.13 Leg 1 Load Loss Alpha level
Leg 1 load loss alpha (firing angle) level.
Sets the alpha level to activate leg 1 load loss function. Alpha values smaller than 36.13 Leg 1
Load Loss Alpha level activate the load loss function.
See 36.12 Leg 1 Load Loss Current level.
0.0 … 180.0 120.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
36.15 reserved
36.16 reserved
36.20 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss Function
Leg 1 partial load loss event.
Leg 1 partial load loss for e.g. increased ohmic values.
This function detects a static increase in load resistance by comparing 36.41 Leg 1 Initial
resistance with the actual measured load resistance, see 36.01 Leg 1 Resistance actual.
The threshold of the partial load loss can be set using 36.22 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss level.
Parameters

186
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
reaction
36.21 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss activation time
Leg 1 partial load loss start time.
Time after the Run signal is given until Leg 1 partial load loss monitoring is activated.
0.01 … 300.00 1.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.22 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss level
Leg 1 partial load loss level.
Level for leg 1 partial load loss event. Recommended threshold settings for resistance fault
detection (all -10 %):
Parallel 99.05 Load Configuration

elements 3 x 1ph 3ph star 3ph delta 3ph star + N 3ph open delta
loads (3S) (3D) (4S) UV / UW (6D)
2 200 % 167 % 122 % 200 % 200 %
3 150 % 133 % 111 % 150 % 150 %
4 133 % 122 % 107 % 133 % 133 %
5 126 % 117 % - 126 % 126 %
6 120 % 113 % - 120 % 120 %
U2 V2 W2
~
0.00 … 325.00 110.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter

36.23 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss delay time
Leg 1 partial load loss delay time.
Delay time for the leg 1 partial load loss event after the conditions are met.
0.0 … 3000.0 1.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
36.25 Leg 1 Partial Load Short Function
Leg 1 partial load short circuit event.
Leg 1 partial load short circuit for e.g. decreased ohmic values.
This function detects a static decrease in load resistance by comparing 36.41 Leg 1 Initial
resistance with the actual measured load resistance, see 36.01 Leg 1 Resistance actual.
The threshold of the partial load short circuit can be set using 36.27 Leg 1 Partial Load Short
level.
reaction
36.26 Leg 1 Partial Load Short activation time
Leg 1 partial load short circuit start time.
Parameters

187
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Time after the Run signal is given until Leg 1 partial load short circuit monitoring is activated.
0.01 … 300.00 1.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.27 Leg 1 Partial Load Short level
Leg 1 partial load short circuit level.
Level for leg 1 partial load short circuit event. Recommended threshold settings for resistance
fault detection (all +10 %):
Serial 99.05 Load Configuration

elements 3 x 1ph 3ph star 3ph delta 3ph star + N 3ph open delta
loads (3S) (3D) (4S) UV / UW (6D)
2 50 % 67 % 80 % 50 % 50 %
3 67 % 78 % 90 % 67 % 67 %
4 75 % 83 % 93 % 75 % 75 %
5 80 % 87 % - 80 % 80 %
6 83 % 89 % - 83 % 83 %
U2 V2 W2
0.00 … 325.00 110.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter

36.28 Leg 1 Partial Load Short delay time
Leg 1 partial load short circuit delay time.
Delay time for the leg 1 partial load short circuit event after the conditions are met.
0.0 … 3000.0 1.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
36.30 Leg 1 Load Overload Function
Leg 1 load overload event.
If leg 1 actual current - see 01.33 Leg 1 Current RMS relative actual - exceeds the current and
the time set by 36.31 Leg 1 Load Overload level and 36.32 Leg 1 Load Overload time this event
is generated.
reaction
36.31 Leg 1 Load Overload level
Leg 1 load overload level.
Leg 1 load overload level to be exceeded in percent of 99.02 Load Current.
0.00 … 325.00 110.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.32 Leg 1 Load Overload time
Leg 1 load overload time.
Leg 1 load overload time to be exceeded.
0.0 … 3000.0 10.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
36.35 Leg 1 Unit Overload Function
Leg 1 unit thermal overload event.
Parameters

188
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
If leg 1 actual current - see 01.30 Leg 1 Current RMS actual - exceeds the units rated current -
see 07.17 Unit output current scaling set - by 36.36 Leg 1 Unit Overload level for the time in
36.37 Leg 1 Unit Overload time this event is generated.
reaction
36.36 Leg 1 Unit Overload level
Leg 1 unit thermal overload level.
Leg 1 unit thermal overload level to be exceeded in percent of 07.17 Unit output current scaling
set.
0.00 … 325.00 110.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.37 Leg 1 Unit Overload time
Leg 1 unit thermal overload time.
Leg 1 unit thermal overload time to be exceeded.
0.0 … 3000.0 10.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
36.40 Leg 1 Resistance Change Function
Leg 1 resistance change event.
If leg 1 resistance is outside the dead band of 36.41 Leg 1 Initial resistance ± 36.42 Leg 1
Resistance change level this event is generated.
Leg 1 resistance is shown in either 36.01 Leg 1 Resistance actual or 36.02 3ph Resistance
actual depending on 99.05 Load Configuration.
reaction
36.41 Leg 1 Initial resistance
Leg 1 resistance change, initial resistance for the load monitoring.
Leg 1 initial resistance is either set manually by the user or automatically by means of 36.43 Leg
1 initial resistance teach in.
0.00 … 1000.00 0.00 Ohm 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
36.42 Leg 1 Resistance change level
Leg 1 Resistance change level.
Leg 1 resistance change level in percent of 36.41 Leg 1 Initial resistance.
-325.00 … 325.00 10.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.43 Leg 1 Initial resistance teach-in
Leg 1 resistance change, teach-in.
Copies the value from 36.01 Leg 1 Resistance actual to 36.41 Leg 1 Initial resistance. The
teach-in must only be started when the load is at operating temperature.
0: Done; teach-in done or not requested.
1: Teach-in; activates the teach-in. The value reverts automatically to Done, when the teach-in is
done.
0…1 Done - 1=1 y y Parameter
36.44 Leg 1 Resistance Change activation time
Leg 1 resistance change start time.
Time after the Run signal is given until leg 1 resistance change is activated.
0.01 … 300.00 1.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.50 Load Current Imbalance Function
Load current imbalance event.
This function detects a load current imbalance in symmetrical 3-phase load configurations - see
99.05 Load Configuration. The highest and lowest load current are compared. If the difference
reaches the value set in 36.52 Load Current Imbalance level this event is generated.
Parameters

189
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
reaction
36.51 Load Current Imbalance activation time
Load current imbalance start time.
Time after the Run signal is given until the load current imbalance function is activated.
0.01 … 300.00 1.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.52 Load Current Imbalance level
Load current imbalance level.
Level for the load current imbalance. Recommended settings are 5 % … 50 %.
0.00 … 325.00 50.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
36.53 Load Current Imbalance delay time
Load current imbalance delay time.
Delay time for the load current imbalance event after the conditions are met.
0.0 … 3000.0 1.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter

Description see group 36 leg 1 Load monitoring.

Description see group 36 leg 1 Load monitoring.
Group 41 Process PID 1

Parameter values for process PID 1 controller.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Process PID 1 controller input selection:
Parameters

190
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Process PID 1 controller function:
41.01 Process PID 1 output actual

Process PID 1 controller output.
Displays process PID 1 controller output.
-325.00 … 325.00 - % 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
41.02 Process PID 1 feedback actual
Process PID 1 controller feedback (actual).
Displays process PID 1 controller feedback after source selection and filtering.
-32767.00 … - See 1=1 y n Signal
32767.00 41.12
41.03 Process PID 1 setpoint actual
Process PID 1 controller setpoint (reference).
Displays process PID 1 controller setpoint after source selection, limitation, ramping and control
panel reference selection.
-32767.00 … - See 1=1 y n Signal
32767.00 41.12
41.04 Process PID 1 deviation actual
Process PID 1 controller deviation (delta).
Displays process PID 1 controller deviation. By default, it is setpoint - feedback, but it can be
inverted using 41.31 PID 1 deviation inversion.
Parameters

191
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32767.00 … - See 1=1 y n Signal
32767.00 41.12
41.06 Process PID 1 status word
Process PID 1 controller status word.
Displays process PID 1 controller status information.
Bit Name High Low

0 PID active Process PID 1 controller active, Process PID 1 controller not
see 41.07 PID 1 operation mode active
1 Setpoint Process PID 1 controller setpoint Process PID 1 controller
frozen frozen, see 41.30 PID 1 setpoint setpoint not frozen
freeze enable
2 Output frozen Process PID 1 controller output Process PID 1 controller
frozen, see 41.38 PID 1 output output not frozen
freeze enable
3 PID sleep reserved
mode
4 Sleep boost reserved
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 6
7 Output limit Process PID 1 controller output is Process PID 1 controller
high limited by 41.37 PID 1 output max output is not in max. limit
8 Output limit Process PID 1 controller output is Process PID 1 controller
low limited by 41.36 PID 1 output min output is not in min. limit
9 Dead band Process PID 1 controller dead Process PID 1 controller
active band active, see 41.39 PID 1 dead band not active
dead band range
10 PID set Process PID 1 controller set2 in Process PID 1 controller
use, see 41.57 PID 1 set1/set2 set1 in use
selection
11 Bit 11
12 Internal Internal setpoint active, see 41.16 External setpoint active
setpoint active PID 1 setpoint 1 source or 41.17
PID 1 setpoint 2 source
13 … Bit 13 … 15
15

41.07 PID 1 operation mode
Process PID 1 controller mode.
Activates / deactivates process PID 1 controller.
0: Off; 0, PID 1 inactive.
1: On; 1, PID 1 active.
Parameters

192
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
21: Leg 1 Operating (6.14.04); process PID 1 controller is active when leg 1 is operating. 06.14
Leg 1 Status Word bit 4 = 1.
0 … 21 Off - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.08 PID 1 feedback 1 source
Process PID 1 controller feedback sources.
Selects the first source of process PID 1 controller feedback.
1: AI1 scaled (12.12); 12.12 AI1 scaled value.
4: Temp 1 Actual (35.01).
0…7 AI1 scaled - 1=1 n y Parameter
(12.12)
41.09 PID 1 feedback 2 source
Process PID 1 controller feedback sources.
Selects the second source of process PID 1 controller feedback.
41.10 PID 1 feedback function
Process PID 1 controller feedback processing.
Defines how process PID 1 controller feedback is calculated using the two feedback sources
selected by 41.08 PID 1 feedback 1 source and 41.09 PID 1 feedback 2 source.
0: In1; source 1.
1: In1+In2; source 1 plus source 2.
2: In1-In2; source 1 minus source 2.
5: MIN(In1,In2); lower of the two sources.
6: MAX(In1,In2); greater of the two sources.
12 In2; source 2.
0 … 12 In1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.11 PID 1 feedback filter time
Process PID 1 controller feedback filter.
Defines the filter time constant for process PID 1 controller feedback.
0.00 … 100.00 0.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.12 PID 1 unit selection
Process PID 1 controller unit selection.
Defines the unit for signals / parameters 41.02 … 41.04, 41.14, 41.21 … 41.24, 41.26, 41.27,
41.39, 41.47, 41.70 and 41.71.
0: No Unit;
1: A; ampere.
2: V; volt.
4: %; percent.
150: °C; degree Celsius.
151: °F; degree Fahrenheit.
Parameters

193
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
152: K; Kelvin.
153: kA; kilo ampere.
0 … 153 % - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.14 PID 1 setpoint scaling
Process PID 1 controller scaling.
Defines, together with 41.15 PID 1 output scaling, a general scaling factor for the process PID 1
control chain.
The output of process PID 1 controller is always in percent [%]. The scaling can be utilized
when, for example, the process setpoint is put in as degree Celsius [°C].
Following formula is valid:
41.15 [%]
Scaling factor [%] = • [41.12]
41.14 [41.12]
With 400 [°C] = 50 [%] process PID 1 controller output value follows:
50 [%]
Scaling factor [%] = • [°C] = 0.125 %
400 [°C]
-32767.00 … 100.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.15 PID 1 output scaling
Process PID 1 controller scaling.
See 41.14 PID 1 setpoint scaling.
-325.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.16 PID 1 setpoint 1 source
Process PID 1 controller setpoint sources.
Selects the first source of process PID 1 controller setpoint. This setpoint is available in 41.25
PID 1 setpoint selection as setpoint source 1.
1: Control panel (3.01); 03.01 Panel reference 1.
2: Internal setpoint; depending on setting of 41.19 PID 1 internal setpoint selector 0 1 and 41.20
PID 1 internal setpoint selector A B.
6: FB A reference 1 (3.05); 03.05 FB A reference 1.
7: FB A reference 2 (3.06); 03.06 FB A reference 2.
9: Motor poti ref (21.80); 21.80 Motor potentiometer ref act.
0…9 AI2 scaled - 1=1 n y Parameter
(12.22)
41.17 PID 1 setpoint 2 source
Process PID 1 controller setpoint sources.
Selects the second source of process PID 1 controller setpoint. This setpoint is available in
41.25 PID 1 setpoint selection as setpoint source 2.
See 41.16 PID 1 setpoint 1 source.
41.18 PID 1 setpoint function
Process PID 1 controller setpoint processing.
Defines how process PID 1 controller setpoint is calculated using the two setpoint sources
selected by 41.16 PID 1 setpoint 1 source, 41.17 PID 1 setpoint 2 source and 41.25 PID 1
setpoint selection.
0: In1 or In2; the source selected by 41.25 PID 1 setpoint selection.
1: In1+In2; source 1 plus source 2.
Parameters

194
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2: In1-In2; source 1 minus source 2.
3: In1*In2; source 1 multiplied by source 2.
4:In1/In2; source 1 divided by source 2.
5: MIN(In1,In2); lower of the two sources.
6: MAX(In1,In2); greater of the two sources.
7: AVE(In1,In2); average of the two sources.
8: sqrt(In1); square root of source 1.
9: sqrt(In1-In2); square root of (source 1 - source 2).
10: sqrt(In1+In2); square root of (source 1 + source 2).
11: sqrt(In1)+sqrt(In2); square root of source 1 + square root of source 2.
0 … 11 In1 or In2 - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.19 PID 1 internal setpoint selector 0 1
Process PID 1 controller internal setpoint selection.
Selects, together with 41.20 PID 1 internal setpoint selector A B, the internal setpoint out of
41.19 PID 1 internal 41.20 PID 1 internal Selected internal setpoint

setpoint selector 0 1 setpoint selector A B
Zero A 41.21 PID 1 internal setpoint 0 A
One A 41.22 PID 1 internal setpoint 1 A
Zero B 41.23 PID 1 internal setpoint 0 B
One B 41.24 PID 1 internal setpoint 1 B

0: Zero; 0.
1: One; 1.
41.20 PID 1 internal setpoint selector A B
Process PID 1 controller internal setpoint selection.
Selects, together with 41.19 PID 1 internal setpoint selector 0 1, the internal setpoint out of
41.19 PID 1 internal 41.20 PID 1 internal Selected internal setpoint

setpoint selector 0 1 setpoint selector A B
One A 41.21 PID 1 internal setpoint 0 A
Two A 41.22 PID 1 internal setpoint 1 A
One B 41.23 PID 1 internal setpoint 0 B
Two B 41.24 PID 1 internal setpoint 1 B

0: A; 0.
1: B; 1.
Parameters

195
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0 … 19 A - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.21 PID 1 internal setpoint 0 A
Process PID 1 controller internal setpoint 0 A.
Defines PID 1 internal process setpoint 0 A.
-32767.00 … 0.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.22 PID 1 internal setpoint 1 A
Process PID 1 controller internal setpoint 1 A.
Defines PID 1 internal process setpoint 1 A.
-32767.00 … 0.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.23 PID 1 internal setpoint 0 B
Process PID 1 controller internal setpoint 0 B.
Defines PID 1 internal process setpoint 0 B.
-32767.00 … 0.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.24 PID 1 internal setpoint 1 B
Process PID 1 controller internal setpoint 1 B.
Defines PID 1 internal process setpoint 1 B.
-32767.00 … 0.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.25 PID 1 setpoint selection
Process PID 1 controller setpoint selection.
Configures the selection between 41.16 PID 1 setpoint 1 source and 41.17 PID 1 setpoint 2
source.
This parameter is only effective when 41.18 PID 1 setpoint function = In1 or In2.
0: Setpoint source 1; 0, 41.16 PID 1 setpoint 1 source.
1: Setpoint source 2; 1, 41.17 PID 1 setpoint 2 source.
0 … 19 Setpoint - 1=1 n y Parameter
source 1
41.26 PID 1 setpoint min
Process PID 1 controller minimum setpoint limit.
Defines the minimum limit for process PID 1 controller setpoint.
-32767.00 … -32767.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.27 PID 1 setpoint max
Process PID 1 controller maximum setpoint limit.
Defines the maximum limit for process PID 1 controller setpoint.
Parameters

196
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32767.00 … 32767.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.28 PID 1 setpoint increase time
Process PID 1 controller setpoint increase time.
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to increase from 0 units to 100 units. The unit
depend on setting of 41.12 PID 1 unit selection.
0.0 … 3600.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
41.29 PID 1 setpoint decrease time
Process PID 1 controller setpoint decrease time.
Defines the minimum time it takes for the setpoint to decrease from 100 units to 0 units. The unit
depend on setting of 41.12 PID 1 unit selection.
0.0 … 3600.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
41.30 PID 1 setpoint freeze enable
Process PID 1 controller setpoint freeze selection.
Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the setpoint of process PID 1 controller.
This feature is useful when the setpoint is based on a process feedback connected to an analog
input and the connected sensor must be e.g. serviced without stopping the process.
0: Release; 0, release process PID 1 controller setpoint.
1: Freeze; 1, freeze process PID 1 controller setpoint.
0 … 19 Release - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.31 PID 1 deviation inversion
Process PID 1 controller deviation (delta) inversion.
Inverts the input of process PID 1 controller.
0: Not inverted (Ref - Fbk); 0, deviation not inverted (deviation = setpoint - feedback).
1: Inverted (Fbk - Ref); 1, deviation inverted (deviation = feedback - setpoint).
0…1 Not - 1=1 n y Parameter
inverted
41.32 PID 1 gain 1
Process PID 1 controller gain 1.
Defines gain 1 of process PID 1 controller. See 41.33 PID 1 integration time 1.
0.000 … 100.000 1.000 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.33 PID 1 integration time 1
Process PID 1 controller integration time 1.
Defines integration time 1 of process PID 1 controller. This time needs to be set to the same
order of magnitude as the reaction time of the process. Otherwise, instability will result.
Parameters

197
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Error/Controller output
O
I
G×I
G×I
Time
Ti
I = controller input (error)

O = controller output
G = gain
T i = integration time
Note: Setting 41.33 PID 1 integration time 1 = 0 disables integration time 1 and turns the
process PID controller into a process PD controller.
0.0 … 3600.0 60.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
41.34 PID 1 derivation time 1
Process PID 1 controller derivation time 1.
Defines derivation time 1 of process PID 1 controller. The derivative component at the controller
output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values, EK-1 and EK, according to following
formula:
(41.34) • (EK -EK-1 )

TS
TS = 2 ms sample time.
Error = E = setpoint - feedback.
0.00 … 100.00 0.00 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.35 PID 1 derivation filter time 1
Process PID 1 controller derivation filter time 1.
Defines derivation filter time 1 of process PID 1 controller. Filter time of the 1-pole filter used to
smooth the derivative component 1 of process PID 1 controller.
Parameters

198
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.00 … 100.00 0.02 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.36 PID 1 output min
Process PID 1 controller minimum output limit.
Defines the minimum limit for process PID 1 controller output. Using the minimum and maximum
limits restricts the operation range.
-325.00 … 325.00 0.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.37 PID 1 output max
Process PID 1 controller maximum output limit.
Defines the minimum limit for process PID 1 controller output. Using the minimum and maximum
limits restricts the operation range.
-325.00 … 325.00 100.00 % 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.38 PID 1 output freeze enable
Process PID 1 controller output freeze selection.
Freezes, or defines a source that can be used to freeze, the output of process PID 1 controller.
This feature can be used when e.g. a sensor providing process feedback must to be serviced
without stopping the process.
0: Release; 0, release process PID 1 controller output.
1: Freeze; 1, freeze process PID 1 controller output.
0 … 19 Release - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.39 PID 1 deadband range
Parameters

199
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32767.00 … 0.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter

32767.00 41.12
41.40 PID 1 deadband delay
Process PID 1 controller delay for deadband area.
Delay for the deadband. See 41.39 PID 1 deadband range.
0.0 … 3600.0 0.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
41.41 … reserved
41.48
reserved
41.57 PID 1 set1/set2 selection

Process PID 1 controller set selection.
Configures the selection between process PID 1 controller set1 (parameters 41.32 … 41.35) or
set2 (parameters 41.60 … 41.63).
0: Select set1; 0, select PID 1 controller set1.
1: Select set2; 1, select PID 1 controller set2.
20: Adaptive set1 and set2; uses process PID 1 controller set1 and process PID 1 controller
set2 to adapt the gain and integration time of process PID 1 controller according to 41.70 PID 1
adaptive switching level A and 41.71 PID 1 adaptive switching level B.
0 … 20 Select set1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.59 PID 1 ramp/panel selector
Process PID 1 controller setpoint selector.
Configures the selection between setpoint from process PID 1 controller ramp or control panel
for 41.03 Process PID 1 setpoint actual.
0: Ramp; 0, select setpoint from process PID 1 controller ramp.
Parameters

200
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
1: Panel; 1, select setpoint from control panel.
2: Auto; control panel = remote mode, follows Auto = 0 (Ramp), control panel = local mode,
follows Auto = 1 (Panel).
0 … 19 Auto - 1=1 n y Parameter
41.60 PID 1 gain 2
Process PID 1 controller gain 2.
Defines gain 2 of process PID 1 controller. See 41.61 PID 1 integration time 2.
0.000 … 100.000 1.000 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
Process PID 1 controller integration time 2.
Defines integration time 2 of process PID 1 controller. This time needs to be set to the same
order of magnitude as the reaction time of the process. Otherwise, instability will result.
Error/Controller output
O
I
G×I
G×I
Time
Ti
I = controller input (error)

O = controller output
G = gain
T i = integration time
Note: Setting 41.61 PID 1 integration time 2 = 0 disables integration time 2 and turns the
process PID controller into a process PD controller.
0.0 … 3600.0 60.0 s 1=1 n y Parameter
41.62 PID 1 derivation time 2
Process PID 1 controller derivation time 2.
Defines derivation time 2 of process PID 1 controller. The derivative component at the controller
output is calculated on basis of two consecutive error values, EK-1 and EK, according to following
formula:
(41.62) • (EK -EK-1 )

TS
TS = 2 ms sample time.
Error = E = setpoint - feedback.
Parameters

201
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0.00 … 100.00 0.00 s 1 = 0.01
n y Parameter
41.63 PID 1 derivation filter time 2
Process PID 1 controller derivation filter time 2.
Defines derivation filter time 2 of process PID 1 controller. Filter time of the 1-pole filter used to
smooth the derivative component 2 of process PID 1 controller.
%
Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
T
O = I × (1 - e -t/T )

O = filter output
t = time
0.00 … 100.00 0.02 s 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
41.70 PID 1 adaptive switching level A
Process PID 1 controller adaptive switching level A.
Process PID 1 controller set1 and process PID 1 controller set2 can be used to adapt the gain
and integration time of process PID 1 controller according to 41.70 PID 1 adaptive switching
level A and 41.71 PID 1 adaptive switching level B:
Start of Process
process setteled
41.32 PID 1 gain 1

41.60 PID 1 gain 2
Linear change
41.61PID 1 integration time 2
41.04 Process PID 1 deviation actual = 100 % =0%

41.70 PID 1 41.71 PID 1
adaptive adaptive
switching level A switching level B
Parameters

202
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Activation, see 41.57 PID 1 set1/set2 selection.
-32767.00 … 20.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12
41.71 PID 1 adaptive switching level B
Process PID 1 controller adaptive switching level B.
See 41.70 PID 1 adaptive switching level A.
-32767.00 … 10.00 See 1=1 n y Parameter
32767.00 41.12

Description see group 41 Process PID 1.

Description see group 41 Process PID 1.
Group 45 Energy efficiency

Settings for the energy saving calculators.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
45.01 … reserved
45.45
reserved
Group 46 Monitoring
Signal filtering and general settings.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
46.04 … reserved
46.14
reserved
Group 47 Data storage

Data storage parameters that can be written to and read from using other parameters.
Note: For different data types, different storage parameters are available.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
47.01 Data storage 1 real32
32-bit data.
Data storage parameter 1.
Note: Not useable in association with bit type signals / parameters e.g. 06.01 Main Control Word
active.
Parameters

203
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
32-bit data.
active.
-2147483.000 … 0.000 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483.000
47.11 Data storage 1 int32
32-bit data.
Parameters

204
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
32-bit data.
-2147483648 … 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
2147483647
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
Parameters

205
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
16-bit data.
active.
-32768 … 32767 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Group 49 Panel port communication

Communication settings for the control panel / PC tool link.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
49.01 Node ID number
Node ID.
Defines the node ID of the unit. All units connected to the network must have a unique node ID.
Note: For units in a network, it is advisable to reserve 49.01 Network ID number = 1 for spare /
replacement units.
1 … 32 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
49.03 Baud rate
Speed of the control panel / PC tool link.
Defines the transfer rate of the control panel / PC tool link.
0: 9.6 kbps; 9.6 kbit/s.
1: 38.4 kbps; 38.4 kbit/s.
2: 57.6 kbps; 57.6 kbit/s.
3: 86.4 kbps; 86.4 kbit/s.
4: 115.2 kbps; 115.2 kbit/s.
5: 230.4 kbps; 230.4 kbit/s.
Parameters

206
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
6: 460.8 kbps; 460.8 kbit/s.
7: 921.6 kbps; 921.6 kbit/s.
0…7 230.4 kbps kbps 1=1 n y Parameter
49.04 Communication loss time
Communication loss timeout.
Defines the time delay for the control panel / PC tool communication before the action defined in
49.05 Communication loss action is executed. Time count starts when the communication link
fails to update the message.
0.3 … 3000.0 10.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
49.05 Communication loss action
Communication loss action.
Selects how the unit reacts to a control panel / PC tool communication break.
1: Fault; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault 7081 is
generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the control
panel / PC tool (local mode).
2: Warning; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, warning
0x1130 is generated. The unit continues with the same current / voltage / power level it was
operating at. This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the control panel / PC tool (local
mode).
4: Fault always; reserved.
5: Warning always; reserved.
Warning! Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break.
49.06 Refresh settings
Refresh command.
Applies the settings of parameters 49.01 … 49.05.
Note: Refreshing may cause a communication break, thus reconnecting the unit may be
required.
0: Done; refresh done or not requested.
1: Refresh; refresh parameters 49.01 … 49.05. The value reverts automatically to Done, when
the refresh is done.
Group 50 Fieldbus adapter (FBA)

Fieldbus communication configuration.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
50.01 FBA A enable
Fieldbus adapter A enable / disable.
Enables / disables communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter A. Specifies the location
of the adapter in slot1 … slot3.
0: Disable; communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter A is disabled.
1: Option slot1; communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter A is enabled. The adapter is
located in slot1.
located in slot2.
located in slot3.
0…3 Disable - 1=1 n n Parameter
50.02 FBA A comm loss func
Parameters

207
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Fieldbus adapter A communication loss action.
Selects how the unit reacts to a fieldbus communication break.
1: Fault; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault 0x5223 is
generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the fieldbus.
2: Warning; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, warning 0x1220
is generated. The unit continues with the same current / voltage / power level it was operating at.
This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the fieldbus.
4: Fault always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault 7510 is
generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs even though no control is expected from the
fieldbus.
5: Warning always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, warning
operating at. This occurs even though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
50.03 FBA A comm loss timeout
Fieldbus adapter A communication loss timeout.
Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication before the action defined in 50.02 FBA A
comm loss func is executed. Time count starts when the communication link fails to update the
message.
0.3 … 6553.5 0.3 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
50.09 FBA A SW transparent source
Fieldbus adapter A status word transparent source.
Selects the source for the status word when the fieldbus communication is in transparent mode.
Transparent mode is set in group 51. The parameter to be used is dependent on the fieldbus.
Other; source selection e.g. 06.13 Global Status Word.
0: Not selected; no source selected.
0…0 Not selected - 1=1 n y Parameter
50.10 FBA A act1 transparent source
Fieldbus adapter A actual value 1 transparent source.
Selects the source for actual value 1.
Other; source selection e.g. a value from group 1.
50.11 FBA A act2 transparent source
Fieldbus adapter A actual value 2 transparent source.
50.12 FBA A debug mode
Fieldbus adapter A debug mode.
Enables the display of the raw (unmodified) data received from and sent to fieldbus adapter A. The
data are displayed in parameters 50.13 … 50.18.
Note: This functionality should only be used for debugging.
0: Disable; display of raw data from fieldbus adapter A is disabled.
1: Enable; display of raw data from fieldbus adapter A is enabled.
50.13 FBA A control word
Fieldbus adapter A raw control word.
Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus adapter A if
50.12 FBA A debug mode = Enable.
Parameters

208
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
00000000h … - - 1=1 y n Signal
FFFFFFFFh
50.14 FBA A reference 1
Fieldbus adapter A raw reference 1.
Displays the raw (unmodified) reference 1 (REF1) sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus
adapter A if 50.12 FBA A debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.15 FBA A reference 2
Fieldbus adapter A raw reference 2.
adapter A if 50.12 FBA A debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.16 FBA A status word
Fieldbus adapter A raw status word.
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (e.g. PLC) if
50.12 FBA A debug mode = Enable.
00000000h … - - 1=1 y n Signal
FFFFFFFFh
50.17 FBA A actual value 1
Fieldbus adapter A raw actual value 1.
Displays the raw (unmodified) actual value 1 (ACT1) sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (e.g.
PLC) if 50.12 FBA A debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.18 FBA A actual value 2
Fieldbus adapter A raw actual value 2.
Displays the raw (unmodified) actual value 2 (ACT2) sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (e.g.
PLC) if 50.12 FBA A debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.21 FBA A timelevel sel
Fieldbus adapter A communication time levels.
In general, lower time levels of read / write services reduce the CPU load. The table below shows
the time levels of the read / write services for cyclic high and cyclic low data depending on 50.21
FBA A timelevel sel:
50.21 FBA A timelevel sel Cyclic high* Cyclic low**

Normal 2 ms 10 ms
Fast 500 μs 2 ms
Very fast 250 μs 2 ms
Monitoring 10 ms 2 ms
*Cyclic high data consist of fieldbus status word, ACT1 and ACT2.
**Cyclic low data consist of the parameter data mapped in groups 52 FBA A data in and 53 FBA A
data out and acyclic data.
Control word, REF1 and REF2 are handled as interrupts generated on receipt of cyclic high
messages.
0: Normal; normal speed.
1: Fast; fast speed.
2: Very fast; very fast speed.
3: Monitoring; slow speed. Optimized for PC tool communication and monitoring usage.
0…3 Normal - 1=1 n n Parameter
Parameters

209
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
50.31 FBA B enable
Fieldbus adapter B enable / disable.
Enables / disables communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter B. Specifies the location
of the adapter in slot1 … slot3.
0: Disable; communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter B is disabled.
1: Option slot1; communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter B is enabled. The adapter is
located in slot1.
2: Option slot2; communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter B enabled. The adapter is
located in slot2.
3: Option slot3; communication between the unit and fieldbus adapter B enabled. The adapter is
located in slot3.
50.32 FBA B comm loss func
Fieldbus adapter B communication loss action.
Selects how the unit reacts to a fieldbus communication break.
1: Fault; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault 7520 is
2: Warning; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, warning 0x1221
is generated. The unit continues with the same current / voltage / power level it was operating at.
This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the fieldbus.
4: Fault always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault 0x5224
is generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs even though no control is expected from the
fieldbus.
5: Warning always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, warning
operating at. This occurs even though no control is expected from the fieldbus.
50.33 FBA B comm loss timeout
Fieldbus adapter B communication loss timeout.
Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication before the action defined in 50.32 FBA B
comm loss func is executed. Time count starts when the communication link fails to update the
message.
0.3 … 6553.5 0.3 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
50.39 FBA B SW transparent source
Fieldbus adapter B status word transparent source.
Selects the source for the status word when the fieldbus communication is in transparent mode.
Transparent mode is set in group 51. The parameter to be used is dependent on the fieldbus.
50.40 FBA B act1 transparent source
Fieldbus adapter B actual value 1 transparent source.
50.41 FBA B act2 transparent source
Fieldbus adapter B actual value 2 transparent source.
Parameters

210
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
50.42 FBA B debug mode
Fieldbus adapter B enable debugging.
Enables the display of the raw (unmodified) data received from and sent to fieldbus adapter B. The
data are displayed in parameters 50.43…50.48.
Note: This functionality should only be used for debugging.
0: Disable; display of raw data from fieldbus adapter B is disabled.
1: Enable; display of raw data from fieldbus adapter B is enabled.
50.43 FBA B control word
Fieldbus adapter B raw control word.
Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus adapter B if
50.42 FBA B debug mode = Enable
00000000h … - - 1=1 y n Signal
FFFFFFFFh
50.44 FBA B reference 1
Fieldbus adapter B raw reference 1.
adapter B if 50.42 FBA B debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.45 FBA B reference 2
Fieldbus adapter B raw reference 2.
adapter B if 50.42 FBA B debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.46 FBA B status word
Fieldbus adapter B raw status word.
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by fieldbus adapter B to the master (e.g. PLC) if
50.42 FBA B debug mode = Enable.
00000000h … - - 1=1 y n Signal
FFFFFFFFh
50.47 FBA B actual value 1
Fieldbus adapter B raw actual value 1.
Displays the raw (unmodified) actual value 1 (ACT1) sent by fieldbus adapter B to the master (e.g.
PLC) if 50.42 FBA B debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.48 FBA B actual value 2
Fieldbus adapter B raw actual value 2.
Displays the raw (unmodified) actual value 1 (ACT2) sent by fieldbus adapter B to the master (e.g.
PLC) if 50.42 FBA B debug mode = Enable.
-2147483648 … - - 1=1 y n Signal
2147483647
50.51 FBA B timelevel sel
Fieldbus adapter B communication time levels.
In general, lower time levels of read / write services reduce the CPU load. The table below shows
the time levels of the read / write services for cyclic high and cyclic low data depending on 50.51
FBA B timelevel sel:
50.51 FBA B timelevel sel Cyclic high* Cyclic low**

Normal 2 ms 10 ms
Fast 500 μs 2 ms
Very fast 250 μs 2 ms
Parameters

211
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Monitoring 10 ms 2 ms
*Cyclic high data consist of fieldbus status word, ACT1 and ACT2.
**Cyclic low data consist of the parameter data mapped in groups 55 FBA B data in and 56 FBA B
data out and acyclic data.
Control word, REF1 and REF2 are handled as interrupts generated on receipt of cyclic high
messages.
0: Normal; normal speed.
1: Fast; fast speed.
2: Very fast; very fast speed.
3: Monitoring; slow speed. Optimized for PC tool communication and monitoring usage.
0…3 Normal - 1=1 n n Parameter
Group 51 FBA A settings

Fieldbus adapter A configuration.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Note:
Since the DCT880 is not a drive, it is not possible to use the profile ABB DRIVES. Use the transparent
profile Trans16.
Example for Profibus-DP:
51.01 FBA A type

Fieldbus adapter A type.
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter A module.
0: Module is not found or is not properly connected, or is disabled by 50.01 FBA A enable.
1: FPBA
32: FCAN
37: FDNA
101: FCNA
128: FENA-11/21
135: FECA
136: FEPL
485: FSCA
0 … 500 - - 1=1 y n Signal
51.02 FBA A Par2
Fieldbus adapter A configuration parameter.
Parameters 51.02 … 51.26 are adapter module-specific. For more information, see the
documentation of the fieldbus adapter module.
Note: Not all of these parameters are necessarily in use.
0 … 65535 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Parameters

212
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
51.03 … FBA A Parxx
51.25
See 51.02 FBA A Par2.
51.26 FBA A Par26

See 51.02 FBA A Par2.
0 … 65535 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
51.27 FBA A par refresh
Fieldbus adapter A refresh.
Validates any changed fieldbus adapter A module configuration settings.
0: Done; refreshing done.
1: Refresh; refreshing. The value reverts to Done automatically, when the refresh is done.
0…1 Done - 1=1 y n Parameter
51.28 FBA A par table ver
Fieldbus adapter A parameter table revision.
Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter A module-mapping file (stored in the
memory of the unit) in format axyz, where ax = major table revision number and yz = minor table
revision number.
51.29 FBA A unit type code
Fieldbus adapter A unit type code.
Displays the unit’s type code in the fieldbus adapter A module-mapping file (stored in the memory
of the unit).
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
51.30 FBA A mapping file ver
Fieldbus adapter A mapping file revision.
Displays the fieldbus adapter A module-mapping file revision stored in the memory of the unit in
decimal format.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
51.31 D2FBA A comm status
Unit to fieldbus adapter A communication status.
Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter A module communication.
0: Not configured; fieldbus adapter A is not configured.
1: Initializing; fieldbus adapter A is initializing.
2: Time out; a timeout has occurred in the communication between fieldbus adapter A and the
unit.
3: Configuration error; fieldbus adapter A configuration error. Mapping file is not found in the file
system of the unit, or mapping file upload has failed more than three times.
4: Off-line; fieldbus adapter A communication is off-line.
5:On-line; fieldbus adapter A communication is on-line or fieldbus adapter A has been configured
not to detect a communication break. For more information, see the documentation of the fieldbus
adapter.
6: Reset; fieldbus adapter A is performing a hardware reset.
0…6 - - 1=1 y n Signal
51.32 FBA A comm SW ver
Fieldbus adapter A, firmware patch and build versions.
Displays the patch and build versions of the adapter module A firmware in format xxyy, where xx
= patch version number and yy = build version number.
Example: C802 = 200.02 (patch version 200, build version 2).
51.33 FBA A appl SW ver
Fieldbus adapter A, firmware major and minor versions.
Displays the major and minor versions of the adapter module A firmware in format xyy, where x =
major revision number and yy = minor revision number.
Parameters

213
Index Name
Text
Range Default UnitScale / Volatile Change - Type
Fbeq16 running
Example: 300 = 3.00 (major version 3, minor version 00).
Group 52 FBA A data in

Selection of data sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (e.g. PLC).
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters. Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data
parameter, the next parameter is automatically reserved.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
52.01 FBA A data in1
Fieldbus adapter A data from the unit to the master (e.g. PLC).
Parameters 52.01 … 52.12 select data sent by fieldbus adapter A to the master (e.g. PLC).
Other; source selection (10 ms update).
0: None; inactive.
4: SW 16bit; status word (16 bit) (2 ms update) via 50.09 FBA A SW transparent source.
5: Act1 16bit; actual value 1 ACT1 (16 bit) (2 ms update) via 50.10 FBA A act1 transparent
source.
6: Act2 16bit; actual value 2 ACT2 (16 bit) (2 ms update) via 50.11 FBA A act2 transparent
source.
15: Act1 32bit; actual value 1 ACT1 (32 bits).
16: Act2 32bit; actual value 2 ACT2 (32 bits).
0 … 16 None - 1=1 n y Parameter
52.02 … FBA A data inxx
52.11
See 52.01 FBA A data in1.
52.12 FBA A data in12

See 52.01 FBA A data in1.
Group 53 FBA A data out

Selection of data sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus adapter A.
Note: 32-bit values require two consecutive parameters. Whenever a 32-bit value is selected in a data
parameter, the next parameter is automatically reserved.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
53.01 FBA A data out1
Fieldbus adapter A data from the master (e.g. PLC) to the unit.
Parameters 53.01 … 53.12 select data sent by the master (e.g. PLC) to fieldbus adapter A.
Other; source selection (10 ms update).
0: None; inactive.
1: CW 16bit; control word (16 bit) (2 ms update) to 06.03 FBA A CW.
2: Ref1 16bit; reference 1 REF1 (16 bit) (2 ms update) to 03.05 FB A reference 1.
3: Ref2 16bit; reference 2 REF2 (16 bit) (2 ms update) to 03.06 FB A reference 2.
12: Ref1 32bit; reference 1 REF1 (32 bits).
13: Ref2 32bit; reference 2 REF2 (32 bits).
Parameters

214
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
53.02 … FBA A data outxx
53.11
See 53.01 FBA A data out1.
53.12 FBA A data out12

See 53.01 FBA A data out1.
Group 54 FBA B settings

Description see group 51 FBA A settings.
Group 55 FBA B data in

Description see group 52 FBA A data in.
Group 56 FBA B data out

Description see group 53 FBA A data out.
Group 58 Embedded fieldbus

Embedded fieldbus configuration.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
58.01 Protocol enable
Enables / disables the embedded fieldbus.
Enables / disables the embedded fieldbus and selects the protocol to use.
Note: When the embedded fieldbus interface is enabled, the device-to-device link - see group
60 DDCS communication - is disabled.
0: None; inactive, communication disabled.
1: Modbus RTU; Embedded fieldbus interface is enabled and uses the Modbus RTU protocol.
58.02 Protocol ID
Protocol ID and revision.
Displays the protocol ID and revision.
58.03 Node address
Embedded fieldbus node address.
Selects the node address of the unit for the embedded fieldbus communication. No two nodes
on-line may have the same address.
Notes:
 The allowable addresses for the embedded fieldbus are 1 … 247.
 Changes to 58.03 Node address take effect after the unit is rebooted or the new setting is
validated by 58.06 Communication control.
0 … 255 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.04 Baud rate
Speed of the embedded fieldbus link.
Defines the transfer rate of the embedded fieldbus link.
Note: Changes to 58.04 Baud rate take effect after the unit is rebooted or the new setting is
0: Autodetect; detects the speed automatically.
1: 4.8 kbps; 4.8 kbit/s.
Parameters

215
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2: 9.6 kbps; 9.6 kbit/s.
3: 19.2 kbps; 19.2 kbit/s.
4: 38.4 kbps; 38.4 kbit/s.
5: 57.6 kbps; 57.6 kbit/s.
6: 76.8 kbps; 76.8 kbit/s.
7: 115.2 kbps; 115.2 kbit/s.
0…7 19.2 kbps kbps 1=1 n y Parameter
58.05 Parity
Parity bit and stop bits.
Selects the type of parity bit and the number of stop bits.
Note: Changes to 58.05 Parity take effect after the unit is rebooted or the new setting is
0: 8 NONE 1; eight data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit.
1: 8 NONE 2; eight data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits.
2: 8 EVEN 1; eight data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit.
3: 8 ODD 1; eight data bits, odd parity bit, one stop bit.
0…3 8 EVEN 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.06 Communication control
Embedded fieldbus refresh.
Validates any changed embedded fieldbus settings or activates silent mode.
0: Enabled; normal operation or refreshing done.
1: Refresh Settings; refreshing. Validates changed configuration settings of the embedded
fieldbus. The value reverts to Enabled automatically, when the refresh is done.
2: Silent Mode; activates the silent mode. No messages are transmitted. Silent mode can be
terminated by setting 58.06 Communication = Refresh Settings.
0…2 Enabled - 1=1 y y Parameter
58.07 Communication diagnostics
Embedded fieldbus communication status word.
Displays the status of the embedded fieldbus communication.
Bit Name High Low

0 Init failed Embedded fieldbus initialization failed -
1 Addr config err Node address not allowed by protocol -
2 Silent mode Unit not allowed to transmit Unit allowed to transmit
3 Autobauding Reserved -
4 Wiring error Errors detected (A/B wires possibly -
swapped)
5 Parity error Check 58.04 Baud rate and 58.05 Parity -
6 Baud rate error Check 58.05 Parity and 58.04 Baud rate -
7 No bus activity 0 bytes received during the last 5 -
seconds
8 No packets 0 packets (addressed to any device) -
detected during the last 5 seconds
9 Noise or Interference or another unit with the -
addressing error same address is online
10 Comm loss 0 packets addressed to the unit received -
within 58.16 Communication loss time
11 CW/Ref loss No control word or references received -
within 58.16 Communication loss time
12 Bit 12 Reserved -
13 Protocol 1 Reserved -
14 Protocol 2 Reserved -
Parameters

216
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
15 Internal error Reserved -

58.08 Received packets
Number of received packets addressed to the unit.
Displays a count of valid packets addressed to the unit. During normal operation, this number
increases constantly.
Can be reset from the control panel by keeping Reset depressed for over 3 seconds.
0 … 4294967295 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.09 Transmitted packets
Number of transmitted packets.
Displays a count of valid packets transmitted by the unit. During normal operation, this number
increases constantly.
0 … 4294967295 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.10 All packets
Number of all received packets.
Displays a count of valid packets addressed to any unit on the bus. During normal operation,
this number increases constantly.
0 … 4294967295 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.11 UART errors
Number of UART errors.
Displays a count of character errors received by the unit. An increasing count indicates a
configuration problem on the bus.
0 … 4294967295 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.12 CRC errors
Number of CRC errors.
Displays a count of packets with a CRC error received by the unit. An increasing count indicates
interference on the bus.
0 … 4294967295 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.14 Communication loss action
Embedded fieldbus communication loss action.
Selects how the unit reacts to an embedded fieldbus communication break.
0: No; no action taken.
operating at. This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the fieldbus.
4: Fault always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault
0x5225 is generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs even though no control is expected
from the embedded fieldbus.
5: Warning always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break,
warning 0x1224 is generated. The unit continues with the same current / voltage / power level it
was operating at. This occurs even though no control is expected from the embedded fieldbus.
58.15 Communication loss mode
Embedded fieldbus communication loss mode.
Parameters

217
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Defines which message types reset the timeout counter detecting an embedded fieldbus
communication loss.
Note: Changes to 58.15 Communication loss mode take effect after the unit is rebooted or the
new setting is validated by 58.06 Communication control.
0: None; no resetting of the timeout counter.
1: Any message; any message addressed to the unit resets the timeout.
2: Cw / Ref1 / Ref2; a write of the control word or a reference from the embedded fieldbus resets
the timeout.
See also 58.14 Communication loss action and 58.16 Communication loss time.
0…2 Cw / Ref1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
/ Ref2
58.16 Communication loss time
Embedded fieldbus communication loss timeout.
Defines the time delay for the embedded fieldbus communication before the action defined in
58.14 Communication loss action is executed.
See also 58.15 Communication loss mode.
Note: Changes to 58.16 Communication loss time take effect after the unit is rebooted or the
new setting is validated by 58.06 Communication control.
0.0 … 6000.0 3.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
58.17 Transmit delay
Embedded fieldbus communication minimum response delay.
Defines a minimum response delay in addition to any fixed delay imposed by the protocol.
Note: Changes to 58.17 Transmit delay take effect after the unit is rebooted or the new setting
is validated by 58.06 Communication control.
0 … 65535 0 ms 1=1 n y Parameter
58.18 EFB control word
Embedded fieldbus raw control word.
Displays the raw (unmodified) control word sent by the Modbus controller (e.g. PLC) to the unit.
For debugging purposes.
00000000h … - - 1=1 y n Signal
FFFFFFFFh
58.19 EFB status word
Embedded fieldbus raw status word.
Displays the raw (unmodified) status word sent by the unit to the Modbus controller (e.g. PLC).
For debugging purposes.
00000000h … - - 1=1 y n Signal
FFFFFFFFh
58.30 EFB status word transparent source
Embedded fieldbus status word transparent source.
Selects the source for the status word.
selected
58.31 EFB act1 transparent source
Embedded fieldbus actual value 1 transparent source.
Selects the source of actual value 1.
selected
58.32 EFB act2 transparent source
Embedded fieldbus actual value 2 transparent source.
Selects the source of actual value 2.
Parameters

218
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
selected
58.33 Addressing mode
Embedded fieldbus addressing mode.
Defines the mapping between parameters and holding registers in the 400101 … 465535
Modbus register range.
Note: Changes to 58.33 Addressing mode take effect after the unit is rebooted or the new
setting is validated by 58.06 Communication control.
0: Mode 0; 16-bit values (groups 1 … 99, indexes 1 … 99):
Register address = 400000 + 100 × parameter group + parameter index.
For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 2200 + 80 =
402280.
32-bit values (groups 1 … 99, indexes 1 … 99):
Register address = 420000 + 200 × parameter group + 2 × parameter index.
For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 420000 + 4400 + 160
= 424560.
1: Mode 1; 16-bit values (groups 1 … 255, indexes 1 … 255):
Register address = 400000 + 256 × parameter group + parameter index.
For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 5632 + 80 =
405712.
2: Mode 2; 32-bit values (groups 1…127, indexes 1…255):
Register address = 400000 + 512 × parameter group + 2 × parameter index.
For example, parameter 22.80 would be mapped to register 400000 + 11264 + 160
= 411424.
0…2 Mode 0 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.34 Word order
Embedded fieldbus word order.
Selects in which order 16-bit registers of 32-bit parameters are transferred. For each register,
the first byte contains the high order byte and the second byte contains the low order byte.
Note: Changes to 58.34 Word order take effect after the unit is rebooted or the new setting is
0: HI-LO; the first register contains the high order word. The register second contains the low
order word.
1: LO-HI; the first register contains the low order word. The second register contains the high
order word.
0…1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
58.101 Data I/O 1
Embedded fieldbus I/O data.
Defines the address in the unit, which the Modbus master accesses when it reads from or writes
to register address 400001.
The master defines the type of the data (input or output). The value is transmitted in a Modbus
frame consisting of two 16- bit words. If the value is 16-bit, it is transmitted in the LSW (least
significant word). If the value is 32-bit, the subsequent parameter is also reserved for it and must
be set to None.
0: None; inactive.
1: CW 16bit; control word (16 bit) to 06.05 EFB CW.
2: Ref1 16bit; reference 1 REF1 (16 bit) to 03.09 EFB reference 1.
3: Ref2 16bit; reference 2 REF2 (16 bit) to 03.10 EFB reference 2.
4: SW 16bit; status word (16 bit) via 58.30 EFB status word transparent source.
5: Act1 16bit; actual value 1 ACT1 (16 bit) via 58.31 EFB act1 transparent source.
6: Act2 16bit; actual value 2 ACT2 (16 bit) via 58.32 EFB act2 transparent source.
12: Ref1 32bit; reference 1 REF1 (32 bits)
Parameters

219
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
13: Ref2 32bit; reference 2 REF2 (32 bits)
15: Act1 32bit; actual value 1 ACT1 (32 bits)
16: Act2 32bit; actual value 2 ACT2 (32 bits)
31: RO/DIO control word; see 10.99 RO/DIO control word.
58.102 … Data I/O xx
58.123
to register address 400002 …. 400023.
See 58.101 Data I/O 1.
58.124 Data I/O 24

to register address 400024.
See 58.101 Data I/O 1.
Group 60 DDCS communication

DDCS (fiber optic) communication configuration.
Fiber optic links connected to DDCS channels can be used to:
 Connect units together to build a master-follower network.
 Connect units to an external controller such as an AC 800M.
All of the above utilize a fiber optic link, which requires FDCO modules. Master-follower and external controller
communication can also be implemented through shielded twisted-pair cable via connector XD2D (device-to-
device link) of the unit.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
60.01 M/F communication port
Master-follower communication (master and followers).
Selects the connection used by the master-follower functionality.
0: Not in use; not active (communication disabled).
1: Slot 1A; channel A of the FDCO module in slot1.
4: Slot 1B; channel B of the FDCO module in slot1.
7: XD2D; connector XD2D (device-to-device link).
0…7 Not in use - 1=1 n y Parameter
60.02 M/F node address
Master-follower node address (master and followers).
Selects the node address of the unit for master-follower communication. No two nodes on-line
may have the same address.
Note: The allowable addresses for the master are 0 and 1. The allowable addresses for
followers are 2 … 60.
1 … 254 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
60.03 M/F mode
Master-follower mode (master and followers).
Defines the role of the unit on the master-follower link.
Parameters

220
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0: Not in use; master-follower communication is not active.
1: DDCS master; the unit is the master on the DDCS master-follower link.
2: DDCS follower; the unit is a follower on the DDCS master-follower link.
3: D2D master; the unit is the master on the device-to-device link. Note: Use setting DDCS
master if using master-follower via device-to-device link.
4: D2D follower; the unit is a follower on the device-to-device link. Note: Use setting DDCS
follower if using master-follower via device-to-device link.
5: DDCS forcing; the role of the unit in the DDCS master-follower link is defined by 60.15 Force
master and 60.16 Force follower.
6: D2D forcing; the role of the unit in the device-to-device link is defined by 60.15 Force master
and 60.16 Force follower. Note: Use setting DDCS forcing if using master-follower via device-to-
device link.
60.05 M/F HW connection
Master-follower hardware connection (master and followers).
Selects the topology of the master-follower link.
Note: Always set to Star when using the master-follower functionality via device-to-device link.
0: Ring; the units are connected in a ring topology. Forwarding of messages is enabled.
1: Star; the units are connected in a star topology (e.g. through a branching unit) or via device-
to-device link. Forwarding of messages is disabled.
0…1 Ring - 1=1 n y Parameter
60.08 M/F comm loss timeout
Master-follower communication loss timeout (master and followers).
Defines the time delay for the master-follower communication before the action defined in 60.09
M/F comm loss function is executed.
As a rule of thumb, 60.08 M/F comm loss timeout should be set to at least 3 times the transmit
interval of the master.
See 60.19 M/F comm supervision sel 1 and 60.20 M/F comm supervision sel 2.
0 … 65535 100 ms 1=1 n y Parameter
60.09 M/F comm loss function
Master-follower communication loss action (master and followers).
Selects how the unit reacts to a master-follower communication break.
See 60.19 M/F comm supervision sel 1 and 60.20 M/F comm supervision sel 2.
operating at. This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the master-follower link.
generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs only when the unit is controlled from the master-
follower link.
3: Fault always; communication break detection active. Upon a communication break, fault
0x5228 is generated and the unit is disabled. This occurs even no control is expected from the
master-follower link.
60.14 M/F follower selection
Master-follower, follower feedback selection (master only).
Defines the followers which data are read. See also parameters 62.28 … 62.36.
0: None; inactive.
2: Follower node 2; data are read from the follower with node address 2.
6: Follower node 2+3; data are read from the followers with node addresses 2 and 3.
Parameters

221
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
14: Follower node 2+3+4; data are read from the followers with node addresses 2, 3 and 4.
60.15 Force master
Master-follower, force master source (master and followers).
In case 60.03 M/F mode = DDCS forcing or D2D forcing, this parameter selects a source that
forces the unit to be the master on the master-follower link.
0: FALSE; 0.
1: TRUE; 1, unit is the master on the master-follower link.
60.16 Force follower
Master-follower, force follower source (master and followers).
In case 60.03 M/F mode = DDCS forcing or D2D forcing, this parameter selects a source that
forces the unit to be a follower on the master-follower link.
0: FALSE; 0.
1: TRUE; 1, unit is a follower on the master-follower link.
60.17 Follower fault action
Master-follower, follower fault action (master only).
Selects how the drive reacts to a fault in a follower.
Notes:
 In the followers:
Each follower to be supervised must be configured to transmit its 06.93.Follower Status Word
as one of the three data words in parameters 61.01 … 61.03.
 In the master:
In the master, the corresponding target parameter 62.04 … 62.12 must be set to Follower
SW.
0: No action; no action taken. Unaffected units on the master-follower link will continue running.
1: Warning; the master generates warning AFE7.
2: Fault; fault FF7E is generated and the master is disabled and all followers will be stopped.
60.18 Follower enable
Master-follower, follower enable (master only).
Interlocks the starting of the master to the status of the followers.
Notes:
 In the followers:
Each follower to be supervised must be configured to transmit its 06.93.Follower Status Word
as one of the three data words in parameters 61.01 … 61.03.
 In the master:
In the master, the corresponding target parameter 62.04 … 62.12 must be set to Follower
SW.
0: FSW bit 0; the master can only be started if all followers are ready to be switched on, see
06.93 Follower Status Word bit 0 Ready for On.
1: FSW bit 1; the master can only be started if all followers are enabled, see 06.93 Follower
Status Word bit 1 Enabled.
2: FSW bits 0 + 1, the master can only be started if all followers are ready to be switched on and
are enabled, see 06.93 Follower Status Word bit 0 Ready for On and bit 1 Enabled.
3: Always; the master can be started independent of the status of the followers.
0…3 Always - 1=1 n y Parameter
60.19 M/F comm supervision sel 1
reserved
Parameters

222
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
60.20 M/F comm supervision sel 2
reserved
60.23 M/F status supervision sel 1
reserved
60.24 M/F status supervision sel 2
reserved
60.27 M/F status supv mode sel 1
reserved
60.28 M/F status supv mode sel 2
reserved
60.31 M/F wake up delay
Master-follower wake-up delay (master only).
Defines a wake-up delay during which no master-follower communication faults or warnings are
generated. This is to allow all units on the master-follower link to power up.
The master cannot be started until the delay elapses or all monitored followers are found to be
ready.
0.0 … 180.0 60.0 s 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
60.41 Extension adapter com port
FEA-xx (F-series Extension Adapter).
Selects the channel of the FDCO module used for connecting an optional FEA-xx extension
adapter.
0: Not in use; not active (communication disabled).
60.50 … reserved
60.104
Group 61 D2D and DDCS transmit data

Defines the data sent from the unit to the DDCS / D2D link.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
61.01 M/F data 1 selection
Master-follower word 1 selector (master and followers).
Selects the data sent as word 1 onto the master-follower link. The value can be seen in 61.25
M/F data 1 value.
Other; source selection e.g. in the master 06.09 Follower Control Word or in the followers 06.93
Follower Status Word.
0: None; inactive.
Parameters

223
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
M/F data 2 value.
Other; source selection e.g. in the master 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
0: None; inactive.
M/F data 3 value.
Other; source selection e.g. in the master 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref.
0: None; inactive.
61.25 M/F data 1 value
Master-follower word 1 value (master and followers).
Displays the data sent as word 1 onto the master-follower link in integer format.
If 61.01 M/F data 1 selection = None, the value to be sent can be written directly onto 61.25 M/F
data 1 value.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y y Parameter
data 2 value.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y y Parameter
data 3 value.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y y Parameter
61.45 … reserved
61.109
Group 62 D2D and DDCS receive data
Defines the data sent from the DDCS / D2D link to the unit.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Master-follower, master word 1 selector (followers only).
Selects the target for the data received as word 1 from the master through the master-follower
link. The value can be seen in 62.25 MF/D2D data 1 value.
0: None; inactive.
1: CW 16bit; control word (16 bit) to 06.94 Follower Control Word received.
2: Ref1 16bit; reference REF1 (16 bit) to 03.13 M/F or D2D ref1.
3: Ref2 16bit; reference REF2 (16 bit) to 03.14 M/F or D2D ref2.
link.
The value can be seen in 62.26 MF/D2D data 2 value.
Parameters

224
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
See 62.01 M/F data 1 selection.
link.
The value can be seen in 62.27 MF/D2D data 3 value.
See 62.01 M/F data 1 selection.
62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel
Master-follower, follower node 2 word 1 selector (master only).
Selects the target for the data received as word 1 from the follower with node address 2 through
the master-follower link.
The value can be seen in 62.28 Follower node 2 data 1 value.
0: None; inactive.
26: Follower SW; status word of a follower. Needed for follower supervision, see 60.17 Follower
fault action and 60.18 Follower enable.
See 62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel.
the master/follower link.
Parameters

225
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
See also parameter 62.36 Follower node 4 data 3 value.
0 … 26 None 1=1 n y Parameter
62.25 MF data 1 value
Master-follower word 1 value (followers only).
Displays the data received from the master as word 1 in integer format.
62.01 M/F data 1 selection selects the target.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
62.28 Follower node 2 data 1 value
Master-follower, follower node 2 word 1 value (master only).
Displays the data received from the follower with node address 2 as word 1 in integer format.
62.04 Follower node 2 data 1 sel selects the target.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
Parameters

226
Index Name
Text
Range Default Unit
Fbeq16 running
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
Displays the data received from the follower with node address 4) as word 3 in integer format.
0 … 65535 - - 1=1 y n Signal
62.37 M/F communication status 1
reserved
62.38 M/F communication status 2
reserved
62.41 M/F follower ready status 1
reserved
62.42 M/F follower ready status 2
reserved
62.45 … reserved
62.109
Group 95 HW configuration
Various hardware-related settings.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
95.16 Set: Unit type code
Hardware setting (write protected).
The unit’s type code is preset in the factory and is write protected. It identifies the unit’s type,
power part type, current-, voltage- and temperature measurement. To un-protect the type code
Parameters

227
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
set 99.07 Service Mode = Set Type Code. The change of the type code is immediately taken
over and 99.07 Service Mode is automatically set back to Normal Operation.
0: W00-0000-00; the type code is set by the user, see 95.17 Set: Unit legs, 95.18 Set: Unit
output current scaling, 95.19 Set: Unit input voltage scaling and 95.20 Set: Unit max power part
temp for e.g. rebuild kits.
…
231: W03-0890-07; type code see table below:
The thyristor power controller’s basic type code: DCT880-AAB-CCCC-DDEF

Product family: DCT880
Type: AA = W0 Standard
Power part type: B =2 Two-leg anti-parallel circuit
=3 Three-leg anti-parallel circuit
Module type: CCCC = Rated AC current (RMS) per leg
Rated AC voltage: DD = 04 110 VAC … 400 VAC
= 05 110 VAC … 525 VAC
= 07 315 VAC … 690 VAC
Power connection: E =X Standard
Revision code: F =0 With SDCS-PIN-H11
=A With SDCS-PIN-H11A
W00-0000-00 … W00-0000- - 1=1 n n Parameter

W03-0890-07 00
95.17 Set: Unit legs
Hardware setting (open).
Amount of legs in the unit. This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in 07.16
Unit legs set.
0: Automatic; set automatically according to 95.16 Set: Unit type code.
1: 1 Leg; single-leg circuit.
2: 2 Legs; two-leg circuit.
3: 3 Legs; three-leg circuit.
0…3 Automatic - 1=1 n n Parameter
95.18 Set: Unit output current scaling
Adjustment of the output current measuring channels (XEXCT on SDCS-PIN-H). 95.18 Set: Unit
output current scaling is write protected, unless 99.07 Service Mode = SetTypeCode. 99.07
Service Mode has to be set back to NormalMode by the user. This value overrides the type code
and is immediately visible in 07.17 Unit output current scaling set.
0: 0; take value from 95.16 Unit type code.
1 … 30000: 1 … 30000; take value from 95.18 Set: Unit output current scaling.
0 … 30000 0 A 1=1 n n Parameter
95.19 Set: Unit input voltage scaling
Adjustment of input voltage measuring channels (XEXVM on SDCS-PIN-H). 95.19 Set: Unit input
voltage scaling is write protected, unless 99.07 Service Mode = SetTypeCode. 99.07 Service
Mode has to be set back to NormalMode by the user. This value overrides the type code and is
immediately visible in 07.19 Unit input voltage scaling set.
1 … 3250: 1 … 3250; take value from 95.19 Set: Unit input voltage scaling.
0 … 3250.0 0.0 V 1 = 0.1 n n Parameter
95.20 Set: Unit max power part temp
Hardware setting (open).
Parameters

228
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Adjustment of the unit’s heat sink temperature tripping level in degree centigrade. This value
overrides the type code and is immediately visible in 07.20 Unit max power part temp set.
1 … 149: 1 … 149; take value from 95.20 S Set: Unit max power part temp.
150: 150; the temperature supervision is inactive (e.g. for rebuild kits).
0 … 150 0 °C 1=1 n n Parameter
95.30 PLL input deviation
PLL input deviation.
Actual measured mains voltage cycle (period) time. Is used as input of the PLL controller.
1
For 50 Hz mains the value should be:  20 ms  0 .
50 Hz
1
For 60 Hz mains the value should be: 16.67 ms  0 .
60 Hz
-180.00 … 180.00 - ° 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
95.31 PLL output, internal mains frequency
PLL output.
Calculated and internally controlled mains frequency. Output of PLL controller.
0.00 … 100.00 - Hz 1 = 0.01 y n Signal
95.34 PLL offset synchronization transformer
PLL offset due to a sync transformer.
Compensation of a synchronization transformer’s phase shift compared to the mains
transformer. The maximum phase shift compensation is ± 60.00°.
-60.00 … 60.00 0.00 ° 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
95.35 PLL deviation level
PLL deviation to block current controller.
Maximum allowed deviation of the PLL controller. The current controller is blocked in case the
limit is reached.
1
For 50 Hz mains is valid:  20 ms  0 .
50 Hz
1
For 60 Hz mains is valid: 16.67 ms  0 .
60 Hz
5.00 … 20.00 10.00 ° 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
95.36 PLL proportional gain
PLL p-part.
Gain of firing unit’s phase lock loop.
0.01 … 2.00 0.50 - 1 = 0.01 n y Parameter
95.37 PLL filter time
PLL filter time constant.
Filter of firing unit’s phase lock loop.
0.0 … 500.0 0.0 ms 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
95.38 PLL Uk compensation
PLL mains transformer uk compensation.
The measured firing angle of the firing unit's PLL can be corrected in order to compensate the
error caused by the commutation notches of the thyristors. The compensation depends on the uk
(short circuit voltage) of the mains.
95.38 PLL Uk compensation defines the mains short circuit voltage, in percent of 99.01 Supply
Voltage, which is caused by the unit’s nominal current for the PLL correction:
Sc
PLL Uk compenzation  u k  100%
St
with: uk = related mains short circuit voltage,
Sc = apparent power of the unit and
Parameters

229
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
St = apparent power of transformer
Commissioning hint:
95.38 PLL Uk compensation is used to compensate for the phase shift of the mains due to the
thyristors switching, in case the mains are measured on the secondary side of the dedicated
transformer.
This situation leads to unstable output currents during high loads. Increase 95.38 PLL Uk
compensation slowly (1 by 1) until the output current becomes stable.
0.0 … 15.0 0.0 % 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Group 96 System
Language selection, access levels, macro selection, parameter save and restore, unit reboot, user parameter
sets, unit selection.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
96.01 Language
Language selection.
Selects the language of the parameter interface and other displayed information when viewed on
the control panel.
This parameter does not affect the languages visible in the PC tool. Those are specified under
View - Settings.
0: Not selected; no language selected.
1033: English US; English.
0 … 3082 Not selected - 1=1 n y Parameter
96.02 Pass code
Pass code.
Pass codes can be entered into this parameter to activate further access levels (for example
additional parameters).
Entering “358” toggles the parameter lock, which prevents the changing of all other parameters
through control panel or PC tool.
00000000 00000000 - 1=1 y y Parameter
96.03 Access levels active
Active access levels.
Shows activated access levels using pass codes entered into 96.02 Pass code.
Bit Name High Low

0 End user Active Not active
1 Service Active Not active
2 Advanced programmer Active Not active
3 Bit 3
4 Bit 4
5 Bit 5
6 Bit 6
7 Bit 7
8 Bit 8
9 Bit 9
10 Bit 10
11 Bit 11
12 Bit 12
13 Bit 13
14 Parameter lock Active Not active
15 Bit 15
Parameters

230
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running

96.04 Macro select
Macro selection.
Selects an application macro.
0: Done; macro selection complete, normal operation.
1: Factory; factory macro selected, all parameters are set to default. The value reverts
automatically to Done, when the chosen macro is loaded.
0…1 Done - 1=1 n n Parameter
96.05 Macro active
Active macro.
Shows which application macro is currently selected. To change the macro, use 96.04 Macro
select.
0…1 - - 1=1 y n Signal
96.07 Parameter save manually
Save all parameters.
Saves the parameter values to permanent memory. 96.07 Parameter save manually should be
used to store values sent from a fieldbus.
Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when changed from the PC tool or control
panel but not when altered through a fieldbus.
0: Done; save completed.
1: Save; save in progress. The value reverts automatically to Done, when all parameters are
saved.
96.08 Control board boot
Rebooting the control board.
Setting 96.08 Control board boot = 1 reboots the control unit. No power off/on cycle of the
complete unit is needed.
0: 0; done.
1: 1; reboot the control unit. The value reverts automatically to 0, when the reboot is done.
0…1 0 - 1=1 y n Parameter
96.10 User set status
Status custom parameter set.
Shows the status of the user parameter sets.
0: n/a; no user parameter sets have been saved.
1: Loading; a user parameter set is loading.
2: Saving; a user parameter set is saving.
3: Faulted; invalid or empty parameter set.
4: User set 1; user parameter set 1 has been loaded.
0…7 - - 1=1 y n Signal
96.11 User set save/load
Save or load custom parameter sets.
Saves or loads one of the four user parameter sets.
The set that was in use before powering down the unit is in use after the next power-up.
Notes:
 The user parameter set active at a power-down is loaded during the next power-up of the unit.
 Settings for hardware configurations such as I/O extension modules and fieldbus configuration
parameters (see groups 14 … 16, 47 and 50 … 56) are not included in user parameter sets.
 Parameter changes made after loading a user parameter set are not automatically stored.
They must be saved using 96.11 User set save/load.
0: No action; load or save operation complete, normal operation.
Parameters

231
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
1: I/O mode; load a user parameter set using 96.12 User set I/O mode in1 and 96.13 User set I/O
mode in2.
2: Load set 1; load user parameter set 1.
18: Save to set 1; save user parameter set 1.
0 … 21 No action - 1=1 n y Parameter
96.12 User set I/O mode in1
Load custom parameter sets in I/O mode.
When 96.11 User set save/load = I/O mode the user parameter set is set as follows:
96.12 User set I/O mode in1 96.13 User set I/O mode in2 Selected user parameter set
0 0 1, User parameter set 1

0: Not selected; 0.
1: Selected; 1.
96.13 User set I/O mode in2
See 96.12 User set I/O mode in1.
96.20 Time synchronization source
Time source selector.
Defines the 1st priority external source for synchronization of the unit’s time and date.
0: Internal; no external source selected.
1: DDCS Controller; from an external controller (e.g. AC 800M).
2: Fieldbus A or B; from fieldbus adapter A or B.
3: Fieldbus A; from fieldbus adapter A.
4: Fieldbus B; from fieldbus adapter B.
5: D2D or M/F; from the master on a master-follower or device-to-device link.
6: Embedded FB; from the embedded fieldbus interface.
8: Panel link; from control panel or PC tool, when connected to the control panel.
9: Ethernet tool link; from PC tool through a FENA module.
10: FA2FA; fieldbus adapter to fieldbus adapter.
0 … 10 Internal - 1=1 n y Parameter
96.23 M/F and D2D clock synchronization
Master-follower time synchronization (master only).
Parameters

232
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Activates the clock synchronization in the master for the master-follower and device-to-device
communication.
0: Inactive; master clock synchronization is inactive.
1: Active; master clock synchronization is active.
0…1 Inactive - 1=1 n y Parameter
96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980
Days since beginning of 1980.
Number of full days passed since beginning of the year 1980.
96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980, 96.25 Time in minutes within 24 h and 96.26 Time in ms within
one minute make it possible to set the date and time in the unit via parameters from a fieldbus or
application program. This may be necessary if the fieldbus protocol does not support time
synchronization.
1 … 59999 0 days 1=1 n y Parameter
96.25 Time in minutes within 24 h
Minutes since midnight.
Number of full minutes passed since midnight. For example, the value 860 corresponds to
2:20 pm.
See 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980.
0 … 1439 0 min 1=1 n y Parameter
96.26 Time in ms within one minute
Milliseconds since last minute.
Number of milliseconds passed since last minute.
See 96.24 Full days since 1st Jan 1980.
0 … 59999 0 ms 1=1 n y Parameter
96.29 Time source status
Time source status word.
Bit Name High Low

0 Time tick received 1st priority tick received: Tick has been received Tick not
from 1st priority source. received
1 Aux Time tick received 2nd priority tick received: Tick has been received Tick not
from 2nd priority source. received
2 Tick interval is too long Tick received: Tick interval too long (accuracy Tick not
compromised). received
3 DDCS controller Tick received: Tick has been received from an Tick not
external controller (e.g. AC 800M). received
4 Master - Follower Tick received: Tick has been received through the Tick not
device-to-device link. received
5 Bit 5
6 D2D Tick received: Tick has been received through the Tick not
device-to-device link. received
7 FbusA Tick received: Tick has been received through Tick not
fieldbus adapter A. received
8 FbusB Tick received: Tick has been received through Tick not
fieldbus adapter B. received
9 EFB Tick received: Tick has been received through the Tick not
embedded fieldbus interface. received
10 Bit 10
11 Panel link Tick received: Tick has been received from the Tick not
control panel or PC tool, when connected to the received
control panel.
12 Ethernet tool link Tick received: Tick has been received from the Tick not
PC tool through a FENA module. received
Parameters

233
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
13 Parameter setting Tick received: Tick has been set by parameters Tick not
96.24 … 96.26. received
14 RTC RTC in use: Time and date have been read from RTC not
the real-time clock. in use
15 Unit On-Time Unit on-time in use: Time and date are displaying
unit on-time.
Group 99 Basic Settings

Unit configuration settings.
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
The following tables give an overview, which combinations between 99.04 Supply Configuration, 99.05 Load
Configuration and 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode are suitable.
99.05 Load Configuration Number of active control loops

One Three
Single-phase: X n/a
9: 3 x 1ph loads (leg 1 or leg 2 or leg 3)
10: 3 x 1ph transformer loads
3 x single-phase: X X
9: 3 x 1ph loads (leg 2 and leg 3 follow leg 1) (leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3)
3-phase (individual loads): X X
1: 3ph star + N (4S) (leg 2 and leg 3 follow leg 1) (leg 1, leg 2 and leg 3)
3: 3ph open delta UV (6D)
4: 3ph open delta UW (6D)
6: 3ph transformer UV (6D)
7: 3ph transformer UW (6D)
3-phase (common load): X n/a
0: 3ph star (3S) (leg 2 and leg 3 follow leg 1)
2: 3ph delta (3D)
5: 3ph transformer (3D/3S)
99.05 Load Configuration 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode

Phase angle Full wave Full wave controls Full wave controls Half wave
controls controls (2, 3), with 99.12 (2, 3), with 99.14 control (4)
(5 … 12) (1 … 3) Leg 1 Start Mode Leg 1 Burst Soft
= First angle Start Ramp
Single-phase direct: X X n/a X X
9: 3 x 1ph loads
3 x single-phase direct: X X n/a X X
9: 3 x 1ph loads
3-phase direct (individual X X n/a X X
loads):
1: 3ph star + N (4S)
3: 3ph open delta UV (6D)
4: 3ph open delta UW (6D)
3-phase direct (common load): X X n/a X n/a
0: 3ph star (3S)
2: 3ph delta (3D)
Single-phase via transformer: X n/a X X n/a
Parameters

234
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
3 x single-phase via X n/a X X n/a
transformer:
3-phase via transformer X n/a X X n/a
(individual loads):
6: 3ph transformer UV (6D)
7: 3ph transformer UW (6D)
3-phase via transformer X n/a X X n/a
(common load):
5: 3ph transformer (3D/3S)
99.01 Supply Voltage

Rated supply voltage.
Rated supply voltage of mains.
0.0 … 3250.0 380.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
99.02 Load Current
Rated load current.
This value equals 100 % current for all relative current signals / parameters.
0.0 … 30000.0 0.0 A 1=1 n y Parameter
99.03 Load Voltage
Rated voltage across the load.
This value equals 100 % voltage for all relative voltage signals / parameters.
0.0 … 3250.0 0.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Describes the configuration at the input (U1, V1, W1) of the unit.
0: 3ph UVW; E.g. for units with 3

legs (W03).
Set 99.01 Supply
Voltage to the
connected phase-to-
phase voltage (e.g.
L1 … L2).
1: 3ph UW eco; E.g. for units with 2

legs (W02).
Set 99.01 Supply
Voltage to the
connected phase-to-
phase voltage (e.g.
L1 … L2).
Parameters

235
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
2: 3 x 1ph + N; For units with 3 legs
(W03) or 2 legs
(W02) connected to
single-phase mains.
Set 99.01 Supply
Voltage to the
connected phase
voltage (e.g. L1 …
N).
3: 1ph + N; Set 99.01 Supply

Voltage to the
connected phase
voltage (e.g. L1 …
N).
4: Multitap 1ph; See DCT880

Multitap Control
Manual
(3ADW000440).
5: Multitap 3ph; See DCT880 Multitap Control Manual (3ADW000440).

6: 2ph Scott; Converts a 3-phase
system to a 2-phase
system with 90°
phase shift.
Set 99.01 Supply
Voltage to the
connected phase-to-
phase voltage (e.g.
L1 … L2).
0…6 3ph UVW - 1=1 n y Parameter

Describes the configuration at the output (U2, V2, W2) of the unit.
Parameters

236
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0: 3ph star (3S); The load is connected in a star
configuration.
Set 99.03 Load Voltage to the
connected phase-to-phase
voltage (e.g. U2 … V2).
1: 3ph star + N (4S); The load is connected in star

configuration with neutral
connected to the star point.
connected phase voltage (e.g.
U2 … N).
2: 3ph delta (3D); The load is connected in a

delta configuration.
3: 3ph open delta UV (6D); The load is connected in an

open delta configuration
(clockwise phase connection U
V W).
4: 3ph open delta UW (6D); The load is connected in an

open delta configuration (anti-
clockwise phase connection U
W V).
Parameters

237
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
5: 3ph transformer (3D/3S); The load is connected via a 3-
phase delta or star
transformer.
6: 3ph transformer UV (6D); The load is connected via a 3-

phase open delta transformer
(clockwise phase connection U
V W).
7: 3ph transformer UW (6D); The load is connected via a 3-

phase open delta transformer
(anti-clockwise phase
connection U W V).
8: Scott transformer; The load is connected via a

Scott transformer.
9: 3 x 1ph loads; The three loads are connected

as single-phase loads to
neutral. Also possible for only
one or two loads.
U2 … N).
Parameters

238
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
10: 3 x 1ph transformer loads; The three loads are connected
as single-phase loads via
single-phase transformers.
Also possible for only one or
two loads.
U2 … N).
0 … 10 3ph star - 1=1 n y Parameter

(3S)
99.06 Start UP Macro
Start-up macro depending on the load configuration.
Macro to preset parameters in groups 23 … 28 and 30 … 33 according to the used load
configuration in 99.05 Load Configuration.
The value reverts automatically to Disable, when the parameters are set.
0: Disable; no macro chosen, normal operation.
1: 3ph star (3S); the load is connected in a star configuration.
2: 3ph star + N (4S); the load is connected in star configuration with neutral connected to the star
point.
3: 3ph delta (3D); the load is connected in a delta configuration.
4: 3ph open delta UV (6D); the load is connected in an open delta configuration (clockwise phase
connection U V W).
5: 3ph open delta UW (6D); the load is connected in an open delta configuration (anti-clockwise
6: 3ph transformer (3D/3S); the load is connected via a 3-phase delta or star transformer.
7: 3ph transformer UV (6D); the load is connected via a 3-phase open delta transformer (clockwise
phase connection U V W).
8: 3ph transformer UW (6D); the load is connected via a 3-phase open delta transformer (anti-
clockwise phase connection U W V).
9: Scott transformer; the load is connected via a Scott transformer.
10: 3 x 1ph loads; the loads are connected as single-phase loads to neutral.
11: 3 x 1ph transformer loads; the loads are connected as single-phase loads via single-phase
transformers.
0 … 11 Disable - 1=1 n n Parameter
99.07 Service Mode
99.07 Service Mode contains test modes, help modes and parameter macros.
The value reverts automatically to Normal operation, when the chosen procedure is finished.
0: Normal operation; no service mode chosen, normal operation.
2: Factory reset; load macro factory (default parameter set).
5: Set Type code; enables the type code parameters of the unit. See 95.16 Set: Unit type code,
95.18 Set: Unit output current scaling and 95.19 Set: Unit input voltage scaling.
6: Reset Leg 1; parameters related to leg 1 (groups 23 / 24 / 30) are set back to factory values
(default values).
(default values).
(default values).
9: Copy Grp 23/24/30/36 to Leg 2; copies leg 1 parameters from groups 23 / 24 / 30 / 36 to leg 2
parameters in groups 25 / 26 / 31 / 37.
10: Copy Grp 23/24/30/36 to Leg 3; copies leg 1 parameters from groups 23 / 24 / 30 / 36 to leg 3
parameters in groups 27 / 28 / 32 / 38.
16: Thyristor Diagnosis; start thyristor diagnosis. The result is displayed in the event logger of the
control panel / PC tool.
Parameters

239
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0 … 16 Normal - 1=1 y n Parameter
operation
99.08 External Current Transformer Scaling
External CT scaling.
Sets the rated current of external current transformers (CTs) connected to XEXCT on the SDCS-
PIN-H.
0.0 … 30000.0 0.0 A 1=1 n y Parameter
99.09 Load Power
Calculated rated load power.
This value equals 100 % power for all relative power signals / parameters.
It depends on 99.02 Load Current, 99.03 Load Voltage and 99.05 Load Configuration.
0.0 … 5000.0 - kW 1=1 y n Signal
99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode
Leg 1 control mode.
Selection of control mode for leg 1.
0: Disable; leg 1 is off.
1: Full wave logic ON/OFF; full wave is on (= 100 % load power) when 06.08 Used Main Control
Word bit 0 = 1. Full wave is off (= 0 % load power) when 06.08 Used Main Control Word bit 0 = 0:
1: Full wave logic ON/OFF

U
i
06.08 Used Main Control Word

Bit 1 = Leg 1 Run
2: Full wave fix cycle; full wave (burst) with fix cycle control. The load power depends on the ratio of
22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref and 99.11 Leg 1 Cycle Time:
U 2: Full wave fix cycle

i
22.11
99.11
99.11 Leg 1 Cycle time
Pload = 22.11 / 99.11
3: Full wave variable cycle; full wave (burst) with variable cycle control. There is no predefined cycle
time. The power controller calculates the optimal ton / toff ratio by itself. It is possible to define a
minimum number of ON or OFF periods by 23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle Variable Burst. The load
Parameters

240
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
power depends on the ratio of ON periods divided by the sum of all ON and OFF periods. Thus, the
load power depends on 23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle Variable Burst and 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref:
3: Full wave variable cycle

U 23.03
23.03
i
Valid for 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref  50 %
U
i 23.03
Valid for 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref > 50 %
23.03 Leg 1 Minimum Cycle Variable Burst

Pload = ton / (ton + toff)
4: Half wave; half wave control. Half wave control is especially designed for infrared or ultra violet
lamps. It works similar to full wave (burst) with variable cycle control, but instead of full waves, half
waves are controlled. This allows a more precise control with a much faster reaction time. The load
power depends on the ratio of ON half waves divided by the sum of all ON and OFF half waves.
Thus, the load power depends on 22.11 Leg 1 Actual Ref:
4: Half wave
U
i ton toff ton toff
Parameters

241
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
U
i ton toff ton toff ton
Pload = ton / (ton + toff)
5: U  open loop control; phase angle control. The load voltage depends on 23.46 Leg 1 Voltage
Control Out open loop (open loop control):
5 … 12: Phase angle control

U
i
6: U²  open loop control; phase angle control. The output is proportional to power and depends on
23.46 Leg 1 Voltage Control Out open loop (open loop control).
7: I  control; phase angle control. The load current depends on 23.29 Leg 1 Current Control Out
(closed loop control).
8: I²  control; phase angle control. The output is proportional to power and depends on 23.29 Leg 1
Current Control Out (closed loop control).
9: U  control; phase angle control. The load voltage depends on 23.45 Leg 1 Voltage Control Out
after Current Limit (closed loop control).
10: U²  control; phase angle control. The output is proportional to power and depends on 23.45 Leg
1 Voltage Control Out after Current Limit (closed loop control).
11: P  control; phase angle control. The load power depends on 23.60 Leg 1 Power Control Out
after Current Limit (closed loop control).
12: Leg 1 External Ref 23.65; phase angle control. Leg 1 external reference in percent of 0 % 
180.0° and 100 %  0.0°.
0 … 12 U  open - 1=1 n y Parameter
loop control
99.11 Leg 1 Cycle Time
Leg 1 cycle time.
Cycle time for 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full wave fix cycle (= 2).
0 … 6000 100 Periods 1=1 n y Parameter
99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode
Leg 1 start.
Defines the start mode of leg 1.
Parameters

242
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
0: Normal; unit starts immediately.
1: First angle; for transformer loads or weak networks. This prevents the high inrush current of
transformers or high starting currents. The first thyristors are fired with the firing angle set in 99.13
Leg 1 First Angle:
99.13 Leg 1 First Angle

U
α
i
Firing at 0 A
2: Soft start; at start the firing angle is moved from 180° … 0° using the amount of periods in 99.14
Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Ramp. Switching OFF is done by setting the firing angle directly to 180°.
Note: This influences only the periods after the start of the unit:
U
i 99.11
22.11
99.14 tfull wave

99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Ramp
tfull wave time with full waves at the load
3: Soft start / soft down; at start the firing angle is moved from 180° … 0° using the amount of
periods in 99.14 Leg 1 Burst Soft Start Ramp. At switching OFF the firing angle is moved to 180°
depending on 99.15 Leg 1 Burst Soft Down Ramp.
Note: This influences only the periods after the start or after switching OFF the unit:
Parameters

243
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
U
i 99.11
22.11
99.14 tfull wave 99.15

99.15 Leg 1 Burst Soft Down Ramp
tfull wave time where the full wave is at the load
4: Soft start / first angle; see 1: First angle and 2: Soft start.
Note: This mode is recommended for weak mains:
U
i 99.11 99.11
22.11 22.11
99.14 tfull wav e

tfull wave time where the full wave is at the load
0…4 Soft start / - 1=1 n y Parameter

soft down
Leg 1 full wave (burst) first angle.
Starting angle for leg 1, mainly used for transformer loads. 90.0° is e.g. the phase shift between
voltage and current of a transformer.
Valid when 99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode = First angle or Soft start / first angle and 99.10 Leg 1 Control
Mode = Full wave fix cycle or Full wave variable cycle.
Note: Recommended setting 75.0° … 115.0°.
0.0 … 180.0 90.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Leg 1 full wave (burst) soft start.
Soft start time in periods in which the firing angle is moved from 180° … 0°.
Valid when 99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode = Soft start … (= 2 … 4) and 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full
wave fix cycle or Full wave variable cycle.
Leg 1 full wave (burst) soft down.
Soft down ramp in periods in which the firing angle is moved from 0° … 180°.
Valid when 99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode = Soft start / soft down and 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode = Full
99.16 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Start Ramp
Parameters

244
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg 1 phase angle control modes start ramp.
Soft start time in which the reference (either 23.22 Leg 1 Current Control Ref 3, 23.37 Leg 1 Voltage
Control Ref 3 or 23.52 Leg 1 Power Control Ref 3) is ramped from 0 … 100 %.
Valid when 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode =  controls (= 5 … 12).
Note: This influences only the positive slope of the reference.
99.17 Leg 1 Phase Angle Soft Down Ramp
Leg 1 phase angle control modes down ramp.
Soft down time in which the reference (either 23.22 Leg 1 Current Control Ref 3, 23.37 Leg 1
Voltage Control Ref 3 or 23.52 Leg 1 Power Control Ref 3) is ramped from 100 … 0 %.
Note: This influences only the negative slope of the reference and does not prolong the Run
command. A stop command terminates the ramping process.
Leg 2 control mode.
0 … 12: see 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode.
13: Follow Leg 1; use the same control mode as leg 1.
14: Follow Leg 1 alternating; reserved.
0 … 14 Follow leg 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Leg 2 cycle time.
Cycle time for 99.25 Leg 2 Control Mode = Full wave fix cycle.
Leg 2 start.
See 99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode.
soft down
0.0 … 180.0 90.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Parameters

245
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Valid when 99.25 Leg 1 Control Mode = α controls (= 5 … 12).
Leg 3 control mode.
0 … 12: see 99.10 Leg 1 Control Mode.
13: Follow Leg 1; use the same control mode as leg 1.
14: Follow Leg 1 alternating; reserved.
0 … 14 Follow Leg 1 - 1=1 n y Parameter
Leg 3 cycle time.
Cycle time for 99.40 Leg 3 Control Mode = Full wave fix cycle.
Leg 3 start.
See 99.12 Leg 1 Start Mode.
soft down
0.0 … 180.0 90.0 ° 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Parameters

246
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Valid when 99.40 Leg 1 Control Mode = α controls (= 5 … 12).
99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration
Output voltage measurement configuration.
99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration describes how the voltages of output phases U2, V2,
W2 are measured or calculated. The values can be seen in 01.60 Leg 1 Voltage RMS relative
actual, 01.61 Leg 2 Voltage RMS relative actual and 01.62 Leg 3 Voltage RMS relative actual.
0: UVW1; the output phase U2, V2, W2 and N1 (neutral) voltages are calculated depending on the
firing angel, see 99.04 Supply Configuration and 99.05 Load Configuration.
1: UVW1+N1; the output phase U2, V2, W2 voltages are
calculated depending on the firing angel, see 99.04
Supply Configuration, and 99.05 Load Configuration. The
voltage of N1 (neutral) is measured via XN1 (X54) on the
SDCS-PIN-H.
2: UVW1 and X60 UVW2; the output phase U2, V2, W2

voltages are measured against each other via XEXVM
(X60) on the SDCS-PIN-H directly at the output.
Parameters

247
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
3: UVW1 and X60 UVW2+N2; the output phase U2, V2,
W2 voltages are measured against N2 (neutral) via
XEXVM (X60) on the SDCS-PIN-H directly at the output.
4: UVW1 and X60 Uext; the output phase U2, V2, W2

voltages are measured against each other via XEXVM
(X60) on the SDCS-PIN-H e.g. after a transformer,
directly at the load.
5: UVW1 and X60 Uext+N2; the output phase U2, V2, W2

voltages are measured against N2 (neutral) via XEXVM
(X60) on the SDCS-PIN-H e.g. after a transformer,
directly at the load.
0…5 UVW1 - 1=1 n y Parameter

99.61 Load Transformer Primary Voltage
Primary voltage of a transformer (see nameplate) connected to the load side (U2, V2, W2) of the
unit. This information is needed for 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration = UVW1 and X60
Uext or UVW1 and X60 Uext+N2 (= 4, 5).
0.0 … 3250.0 380.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
Parameters

248
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
99.62 Load Transformer Secondary Voltage
Secondary voltage of a transformer (see nameplate) connected to the load side (U2, V2, W2) of the
unit. This information is needed for 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration = UVW1 and X60
Uext or UVW1 and X60 Uext+N2 (= 4, 5).
0.0 … 3250.0 380.0 V 1 = 0.1 n y Parameter
99.64 Leg 1 Voltage Feedback
Leg 1, output phase U2 voltage feedback source.
Leg 1 source for the actual voltage of the voltage controller. The value can be seen in 23.38 Leg 1
Voltage Actual:
Load Leg1 Voltage

99.05 Configuration 99.64
Feedback
Voltage
99.60 Measurement
Configuration 0: NULL 23.38
X60 1: Internal U act1
2: AI1 scaled
3: AI2 scaled
4: AI3 scaled
23.75 5: External
: Other

0: NULL; no voltage feedback selected, output value is forced to zero.
1: Internal (01.60); U2 internal voltage feedback, see 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration.
2: AI1 scaled (12.12); U2 voltage feedback via analog input 1.
5: External (23.75); U2 voltage feedback via overriding control system.
0…5 Internal (01.60) - 1=1 n y Parameter
Leg 2, output phase V2 voltage feedback source.
Voltage Actual:
Load Leg2 Voltage

Feedback
Voltage
99.60 Measurement
2: AI1 scaled
3: AI2 scaled
4: AI3 scaled
25.75 5: External
: Other

1: Internal (01.61); V2 internal voltage feedback, see 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration.
2: AI1 scaled (12.12); V2 voltage feedback via analog input 1.
Parameters

249
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
5: External (25.75); V2 voltage feedback via overriding control system.
0…5 Internal - 1=1 n y Parameter
(01.61)
Leg 3, output phase W2 voltage feedback source.
Voltage Actual:
Load Leg3 Voltage
Feedback
Voltage
99.60 Measurement
2: AI1 scaled
3: AI2 scaled
4: AI3 scaled
27.75 5: External
: Other

1: Internal (01.62); W2 internal voltage feedback, see 99.60 Voltage Measurement Configuration.
2: AI1 scaled (12.12); W2 voltage feedback via analog input 1.
5: External (27.75); W2 voltage feedback via overriding control system.
(01.63)
99.70 Current Measurement Configuration
Output current measurement configuration.
99.70 Current Measurement Configuration describes how the current of output phases U2, V2, W2
are measured or calculated. The values can be seen in 01.33 Leg 1 Current RMS relative actual,
01.34 Leg 2 Current RMS relative actual and 01.35 Leg 3 Current RMS relative actual.
0: Internal, measure phase V; the output phase U2, V2, W2 currents are measured internally. This is
possible in units W03 and units W02 with a 3rd external CT.
1: Internal, calculate phase V; the output phase U2, W2 currents are measured internally. Output
phase V2 current is calculated. This is needed for units W02 without a 3rd external CT.
2: External star; the output phase U2, V2, W2 currents are measured via external CTs connected at
XEXCT on the SDCS-PIN-H. The load is a star configuration.
3: External delta; the output phase U2, V2, W2 currents are measured via external CTs connected at
XEXCT on the SDCS-PIN-H. The load is a delta configuration.
0…3 Internal, - 1=1 n y Parameter
phase V
measured
99.74 Leg 1 Current Feedback
Leg 1, output phase U2 current feedback source.
Leg 1 source for the actual current of the current controller. The value can be seen in 23.23 Leg 1
Current Actual:
Parameters

250
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Load Leg1 Current

Feedback
Current
99.70 Measurement 23.23
Configuration 0: NULL
INT 1: Internal I Actual
X65 2: 3ph Current

3: AI1 scaled
4: AI2 scaled
5: AI3 scaled
23.77 6: External
: Other

0: NULL; no current feedback selected, output value is forced to zero.
1: Internal (01.33); U2 internal current feedback, see 99.70 Current Measurement Configuration.
2: 3ph current (01.37); 3-phase current feedback for delta load configurations.
3: AI1 scaled (12.12); U2 current feedback via analog input 1.
6: External (23.77); U2 current feedback via overriding control system.
(01.33)
Leg 2, output phase V2 current feedback source.
Current Actual:
Load Leg2 Current

Feedback
Current
X65 2: 3ph Current

3: AI1 scaled
4: AI2 scaled
5: AI3 scaled
25.77 6: External
: Other

1: Internal (01.34); V2 internal current feedback, see 99.70 Current Measurement Configuration.
3: AI1 scaled (12.12); V2 current feedback via analog input 1.
6: External (25.77); V2 current feedback via overriding control system.
(01.34)
Leg 3, output phase W2 current feedback source.
Parameters

251
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Current Actual:
Load Leg3 Current

Feedback
Current
X65 2: 3ph Current

3: AI1 scaled
4: AI2 scaled
5: AI3 scaled
27.77 6: External
: Other

1: Internal (01.35); W2 internal current feedback, see 99.70 Current Measurement Configuration.
3: AI1 scaled (12.12); W2 current feedback via analog input 1.
6: External (27.77); W2 current feedback via overriding control system.
(01.35)
99.84 Leg 1 Power Feedback
Leg 1, output phase U2 power feedback source.
Leg 1 source for the actual power of the power controller. The value can be seen in 23.53 Leg 1
Power Actual:
Leg1 Power
99.84
Feedback
0: NULL 23.53
1: 1ph Power (1.53) P act1
I act1 23.23 2: 3ph Power (1.57)

U act1 23.28 x 3: 1ph Power
calculated
4: 3ph Power
calculated
25.23 5: AI1 scaled
25.28 x 6: AI2 scaled
27.23 7: AI3 scaled
27.28 x 23.80 8: External
: Other

0: NULL; no power feedback selected, output value is forced to zero.
1: 1ph Power (01.53); U2 power feedback measured internally for single controlled load
configurations.
2: 3ph Power (01.57); 3-phase power feedback measured internally for delta / star load
configurations.
3: 1ph Power calculate; U2 power feedback calculated for single controlled load configurations.
Parameters

252
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
4: 3ph Power calculate; 3-phase power feedback calculated for delta / star load configurations.
5: AI1 scaled (12.12); U2 power feedback via analog input 1.
8: External (23.80); U2 power feedback via overriding control system.
0…8 1ph Power - 1=1 n y Parameter
(01.53)
Leg 2, output phase V2 power feedback source.
Power Actual:
Leg2 Power
99.85
Feedback
0: NULL 25.53
I act1 25.23 2: 3ph Power (1.57)

calculated
4: 3ph Power
calculated
23.23 5: AI1 scaled
27.23 7: AI3 scaled
27.28 x 25.80 8: External
: Other

1: 1ph Power (01.54); V2 power feedback measured internally for single controlled load
configurations.
configurations.
3: 1ph Power calculate; V2 power feedback calculated for single controlled load configurations.
5: AI1 scaled (12.12); V2 power feedback via analog input 1.
8: External (25.80); V2 power feedback via overriding control system.
(01.54)
Leg 3, output phase W2 power feedback source.
Power Actual:
Parameters

253
Index Name
Text
Fbeq16 running
Leg3 Power
99.86
Feedback
0: NULL 27.53
I act1 27.23 2: 3ph Power (1.57)

calculated
4: 3ph Power
calculated
25.23 5: AI1 scaled
23.23 7: AI3 scaled
23.28 x 27.80 8: External
: Other

1: 1ph Power (01.55); W2 power feedback measured internally for single controlled load
configurations.
configurations.
3: 1ph Power calculate; W2 power feedback calculated for single controlled load configurations.
5: AI1 scaled (12.12); W2 power feedback via analog input 1.
8: External (27.80); W2 power feedback via overriding control system.
(01.55)
Parameters

254
Troubleshooting warnings and faults

The chapter lists the warning and fault messages including possible causes and corrective actions. The
causes of most warnings and faults can be identified and corrected using the information in this chapter.
Protective functions
The DCT880 power controller has various protective functions as listed below to prevent the system from
going down and reduce system downtime. The protective functions marked with an asterisk (*) in the table are
disabled by default. Enable them according to your needs.
One of the protective functions is the fault. Upon detection of an abnormal state a fault code is displayed and
the power controller trips.
A warning displays the warning code but lets the power controller continue the current operation.
If any problem arises, understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in the
following section and onwards for troubleshooting.
All indications are stored in the event log with a time stamp and other information. The event log stores
information on the last 5 faults that tripped the unit and the last 20 secondary events that occurred. The event
log can be accessed from the main Menu of the control panel. It can also be accessed (and reset) using the
PC tool.
Protective function Description

Fault This function detects an abnormal state, displays the corresponding fault code,
and causes the power controller to trip. For details of each fault code, see the
section Table of event codes.
Warning This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a warning. A warning code
is displayed and the power converter continues the current operation without
tripping.
It is possible to define which abnormal load states should be categorized as a
warning using parameters in groups 36 … 38. For details of each warning code,
see the section Table of event codes.
Auto Reset When the power controller has stopped because of a trip, this function allows the
power controller to automatically reset and restart itself. The number of retries and
the waiting time between stop and reset can be specified.
Reset This function enables a reset of any protective function / faults.
Before proceeding with troubleshooting

Warning
If any of the protective functions has been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that the all
run commands are set to OFF, reset the fault. If the fault is reset while any run commands are set to ON, the
power controller will supply power to the load.
Injury may occur:
 Even if the power controller has interrupted power to the load, as long as mains voltage is applied to the
input terminals U1 / V1 / W1, voltage may be at the output terminals U2 / V2 / W2.
 Disconnect the mains voltage and auxiliary voltage, wait at least two minutes and follow the safety rules.
Make sure, using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the voltage between the terminals U1 / V1 /
W1 and U2 / V2 / W2 has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Otherwise electric shock may occur.
Follow the procedure below to solve problems:

 First, check that the power controller is correctly wired, see chapter Wiring.
 Check, whether a warning- or fault code is displayed on the control panel or 7-segment display.
1. If a fault code appears, go to the fault description, see Table fault and warning codes.
2. If a warning code appears, go to the warning description, see Table fault and warning codes.
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your ABB representative.

255
Warning- or fault code on the control panel or 7-segment display

Numerical list of warning and fault codes
If the power controller detects an event, check whether any warning- or fault code appears on the control
panel or the 7-segment display.
As listed below, some warnings and fault codes are followed by auxiliary codes (see event log in the PC tool)
that show detailed problem causes.
Overview
Type From To From To Type
Notices 0x7100 0x7199 0x1100 0x1299 Warnings
Events 0x8100 0x8199 0x1300 0x1399 User warnings
User events 0x8300 0x8399
0x2100 0x2199 DCT880 leg 1 warnings
0x2200 0x2299 DCT880 leg 2 warnings
DCT880 leg 1 warnings 0x2100 0x2199 0x2300 0x2399 DCT880 leg 3 warnings
DCT880 leg 2 warnings 0x2200 0x2299 0x2800 0x2899 DCT800 global warnings
DCT880 leg 3 warnings 0x2300 0x2399
DCT800 global warnings 0x2800 0x2899 0x3100 0x3199 DCT880 leg 1 faults
Warnings 0x1100 0x1299 0x3200 0x3299 DCT880 leg 2 faults
User warnings 0x1300 0x1399 0x3300 0x3399 DCT880 leg 3 faults
0x3800 0x3899 DCT800 global faults
DCT880 leg 1 faults 0x3100 0x3199 0x5200 0x5299 Faults 1

DCT880 leg 2 faults 0x3200 0x3299 0x5500 0x5599 Faults 2
DCT880 leg 3 faults 0x3300 0x3399 0x5600 0x5699 User faults
DCT800 global faults 0x3800 0x3899
Faults 1 0x5200 0x5299
Faults 2 0x5500 0x5599 0x7100 0x7199 Notices
User faults 0x5600 0x5699
0x8100 0x8199 Events
0x8300 0x8399 User events
Warnings
Warning Message Additional information
code
Unicos 0x1122 FBA A parameter conflict The thyristor power controller does not have the
functionality requested by the PLC, or the requested
functionality has not been activated.
 Check the PLC program.
 Check parameter settings in groups 50 Fieldbus
adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A settings.
Unicos 0x1123 FBA B parameter conflict The thyristor power controller does not have the
 Check PLC program.
 Check parameter settings of groups 50 Fieldbus
adapter (FBA) and 54 FBA B settings.
Unicos 0x1127 Analog input supervision An analog signal is outside the limits specified for an
analog input.
Programmable warning:  Check the auxiliary code (format 0000 0XYY). “X”
12.03 AI supervision function specifies the location of the input (0: AI on SDCS-
CON-H; 1: I/O extension module 1, etc.), “YY”
specifies the input and limit (01: AI1 under minimum,

256

code
02: AI1 over maximum, 03: AI2 under minimum, 04:
AI2 over maximum).
 Check signal level at the analog input.
 Check the wiring connected to the input.
 Check the minimum and maximum limits of the input
in group 12 Standard AI.
Unicos 0x1129 Service active
Unicos 0x1130 Control panel loss Control panel or PC tool selected as active control
location for the thyristor power controller has ceased
Programmable warning: communicating.
49.05 Communication loss  Check PC tool or control panel connection.
action  Check control panel connector.
 Replace control panel mounting platform.
Unicos 0x1131 AI parametrization The current / voltage jumper setting of an analog input
does not correspond to the parameter setting.
 Check the auxiliary code. The code identifies the
analog input whose settings are in conflict.
 Match jumper settings J1 and J2 on the SDCS-
CON-H to 12.15 AI1 unit selection and 12.25 AI2
unit selection.
Note: Control board reboot (either by cycling the power
or via 96.08 Control board boot) is required to validate
any changes in the jumper settings.
Unicos 0x1132 Parameter Setting Mismatch See page 274.
Unicos 0x1133 Internal SW error Internal error.
 Contact your local ABB representative, quoting the
auxiliary code.
Unicos 0x1134 Flash erase speed exceeded
Unicos 0x1201 External warning 1 Warning generated by external device 1. This
information is configured through one of programmable
Programmable warning: digital inputs.
28.01 External event 1 source  Check external devices.
28.02 External event 1 type  Check settings in group 28.
 Reference page 273.
 See page 273.
 See page 273.
 See page 273.

257

code
28.10 External event 5 type  Check external devices.
 Check settings in group 28.
 See page 273.
Unicos 0x1217 Extension AI parameterization The hardware current / voltage setting of an analog input
(on an I/O extension module) does not correspond to the
parameter settings.
 Check the auxiliary code (format 0000 XXYY). “XX”
specifies the number of the I/O extension module
(01: group 14 I/O extension module 1, 02: 15 I/O
extension module 2, 03: 16 I/O extension module 3).
“YY” specifies the analog input of the module.
Example: In case of I/O extension module 1 and
analog input AI1 (auxiliary code = 0000 0101) the
hardware current / voltage setting of the module is
shown in 14.29 AI1 HW switch position. The
corresponding parameter setting is 14.30 AI1 unit
selection. Adjust either the hardware setting on the
module or the parameter to solve the mismatch.
Note: Control board reboot (either by cycling the power
or via 96.08 Control board boot) is required to validate
any changes in the hardware settings.
Unicos 0x1218 Extension I/O configuration The I/O extension module types and locations specified
failure by parameters do not match the detected configuration.
 Check the auxiliary code. The code indicates which
I/O extension module is affected.
 Check the type and location settings of the modules
(parameters 14.01, 14.02, 15.01, 15.02, 16.01 and
16.02).
 Check that the modules are properly installed.
Unicos 0x1220 FBA A communication Cyclical communication between thyristor power
controller and fieldbus adapter module A or between
Programmable warning: PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost.
50.02 FBA A comm loss func  Check status of the fieldbus communication. See
user documentation of the fieldbus interface.
adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A settings 52 FBA A
data in and 53 FBA A data out.
 Check cable connections.
 Check if communication master is able to
communicate.
Unicos 0x1221 FBA B communication Cyclical communication between thyristor power
controller and fieldbus adapter module B or between
Programmable warning: PLC and fieldbus adapter module B is lost.
50.32 FBA B comm loss func  Check status of the fieldbus communication. See
adapter (FBA) and 54 FBA B settings 55 FBA B
data in and 56 FBA B data out.
communicate.
Unicos 0x1222 DDCS controller DDCS (fiber optic) communication between thyristor
communication loss power controller and external controller is lost.
 Check the status of the controller. See user
Programmable warning: documentation of the controller.
 Check settings in group 60 DDCS communication.

258

code
60.59 DDCS controller comm 
Check fiber optic cable connections. If necessary,
loss function replace fiber optic cables.
Unicos 0x1223 M/F communication loss Master-follower communication is lost.
Programmable warning: node address (defined by 60.02 M/F node address
60.09 M/F comm loss function in each unit) on the master-follower link is affected.
 Check cable connections. If necessary, replace
cables.
Unicos 0x1224 EFB communication loss Communication break in embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication.
Programmable warning:  Check the status of the fieldbus master (online /
58.14 Communication loss offline / error etc.).
action  Check cable connections to the XD2D connector on
the control unit.
 Check communications with the master, PLC or
supervisory controller. See 58.07 Comm
diagnostics, 58.08 Received packets and 58.09
Transmitted packets to adjust settings.
Unicos 0x1225 Process PID 1 sleep mode reserved
Unicos 0x1229 DDCS communication DDCS (fiber optic) communication between thyristor
between thyristor power power controllers is lost.
controllers is lost  Check the status of the thyristor power controllers.
 Check fiber optic cable connections. If necessary,
replace fiber optic cables.
Unicos 0x1230 Follower A follower thyristor power controller has a warning.
 Check the auxiliary code. Add 2 to the code to find
out the node address of the thyristor power
controller with a warning.
 Remove the cause of the warning in the follower
thyristor power controller.
Unicos 0x1233 Checksum mismatch
User warnings
code
Unicos 0x1301 AP Warning 1 reserved
DCT880 leg 1 warnings

code
DCT880 0x2101 Leg 1 Overcurrent See page 270.
DCT880 0x2102 Leg 1 Mains Overvoltage See page 271.
DCT880 0x2103 Leg 1 Thyristor Short Circuit See page 271.
DCT880 0x2104 Leg 1 Thyristor Open Circuit See page 272.
DCT880 0x2105 Leg 1 Mains Undervoltage See page 272.
DCT880 0x2106 Leg 1 Internal Semiconductor reserved
Fuse Open Circuit

259

code
DCT880 0x2151 Leg 1 Load Loss See page 274.
Programmable warning:
Function
DCT880 0x2152 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss See page 275.
36.20 Leg 1 Partial Load Loss
Function
DCT880 0x2153 Leg 1 Partial Load Short See page 275.
Circuit
36.25 Leg 1 Partial Load
Short Function
DCT880 0x2154 Leg 1 Unit Thermal Overload See page 273.
36.35 Leg 1 Unit Overload
Function
DCT880 0x2155 Leg 1 Load Overload See page 275.
36.30 Leg 1 Load Overload
Function
DCT880 0x2157 Leg 1 Load Aging See page 276.
36.40 Leg 1 Resistance
change function
DCT880 0x2158 Leg 1 Load Current Imbalance See page 277.
36.50 Leg 1 Load Current
Imbalance Function

code
Fuse Open Circuit
Function

260

code
Function
Circuit
Short Function
Function
Function
change function
Imbalance Function

code
Fuse Open Circuit
Function
Function
Circuit
Short Function

261

code
Function
Function
change function
Imbalance Function
DCT800 global warnings

code
DCT880 0x2804 Power Part Overtemperature  Check 95.20 Set: Unit max power part temp.
DCT880 leg 1 faults

Fault Message Additional information
code
Fuse Open Circuit
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Circuit
Programmable fault:
Short Function
Programmable fault:
Function

262

code
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
change function
Programmable fault:
Imbalance Function
DCT880 leg 2 faults

code
Fuse Open Circuit
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Circuit
Programmable fault:
Short Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
change function

263

code
Programmable fault:
Imbalance Function
DCT880 leg 3 faults

code
Fuse Open Circuit
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Circuit
Programmable fault:
Short Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
Function
Programmable fault:
change function
Programmable fault:
Imbalance Function

264
DCT880 global faults

code
DCT880 0x3801 Type mismatch  Check 95.16 Set: Unit type code.
DCT880 0x3802 Option error
DCT880 0x3803 Communication error
DCT880 0x3804 Power Part Overtemperature  Check 95.20 Set: Unit max power part temp.
DCT880 0x3805 Inconsistent data
DCT880 0x3806 Enable circuit
DCT880 0x3807 Overtemperature
DCT880 0x3811 Synchronization  Check, that the supply configuration fits to the
setting of 99.04 Supply Configuration.
DCT880 0x3812 System
DCT880 0x3813 IEC61131
Faults 1
code
Unicos 0x5211 External fault 1 Fault generated by external device 1. This information is
configured through one of programmable digital inputs.
Programmable fault:  Check external devices.
28.01 External event 1 source  Check settings in group 28.
28.02 External event 1 type  Reference page 273.
Unicos 0x5220 STO active
Unicos 0x5221 Rating ID mismatch The hardware of the thyristor power converter does not
match the information stored in the memory unit. This
may occur e.g. after a firmware update or memory unit
replacement.
 Cycle the power of the thyristor power converter.
 Check 95.16 Set: Unit type code.
Unicos 0x5223 FBA A communication Cyclical communication between thyristor power
controller and fieldbus adapter module A or between
Programmable fault: PLC and fieldbus adapter module A is lost.
50.02 FBA A comm loss func  Check status of the fieldbus communication. See

265

code
Check parameter settings in groups 50 Fieldbus
adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A settings 52 FBA A
data in and 53 FBA A data out.
communicate.
Unicos 0x5224 FBA B communication Cyclical communication between thyristor power
controller and fieldbus adapter module B or between
Programmable fault: PLC and fieldbus adapter module B is lost.
50.32 FBA B comm loss func  Check status of the fieldbus communication. See
adapter (FBA) and 54 FBA B settings 55 FBA B
data in and 56 FBA B data out.
communicate.
Unicos 0x5225 EFB communication loss Communication break in embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication.
Programmable fault:  Check the status of the fieldbus master (online /
58.14 Communication loss offline / error etc.).
action  Check cable connections to the XD2D connector on
the control unit.
 Check communications with the master, PLC or
supervisory controller. See 58.07 Comm
diagnostics, 58.08 Received packets and 58.09
Transmitted packets to adjust settings.
Unicos 0x5226 DDCS communication DDCS (fiber optic) communication between thyristor
between thyristor power power controllers is lost.
controllers is lost  Check the status of the thyristor power controllers.
 Check fiber optic cable connections. If necessary,
Unicos 0x5227 DDCS controller DDCS (fiber optic) communication between thyristor
communication loss power controller and external controller is lost.
 Check the status of the controller. See user
Programmable fault: documentation of the controller.
60.59 DDCS controller comm  Check settings in group 60 DDCS communication.
loss function  Check fiber optic cable connections. If necessary,
Unicos 0x5228 M/F communication loss Master-follower communication is lost.
Programmable fault: node address (defined by 60.02 M/F node address
60.09 M/F comm loss function in each unit) on the master-follower link is affected.
 Check cable connections. If necessary, replace
cables.
Unicos 0x5229 FBA A force trip A trip command has been received through fieldbus
adapter A.
 Check the fault information provided by the PLC.
Unicos 0x5230 FBA B force trip A trip command has been received through fieldbus
adapter B.
 Check the fault information provided by the PLC.
Unicos 0x5231 EFB force trip A trip command has been received through the
embedded fieldbus (EFB) interface.

266

code
 Check the fault information provided by the Modbus
controller.
Unicos 0x5232 Follower A follower thyristor power controller has tripped.
 Check the auxiliary code. Add 2 to the code to find
out the node address of the faulted thyristor power
controller.
 Correct the fault in the follower thyristor power
controller.
Unicos 0x5233 FBA A mapping file Fieldbus adapter A mapping file read error.
 Contact your local ABB representative.
Unicos 0x5234 FBA A parameter conflict The thyristor power controller does not have the
 Check the PLC program.
adapter (FBA) and 51 FBA A settings.
Unicos 0x5235 FBA B mapping file Fieldbus adapter B mapping file read error.
Unicos 0x5236 FBA B parameter conflict The thyristor power controller does not have the
 Check PLC program.
 Check parameter settings of groups 50 Fieldbus
adapter (FBA) and 54 FBA B settings.
Unicos 0x5237 EFB configuration file Embedded fieldbus (EFB) configuration file could not be
read.
 Reload the firmware. Contact your local ABB
representative if the fault persists.
Unicos 0x5238 EFB invalid parameterization Embedded fieldbus (EFB) parameter settings
inconsistent or not compatible with selected protocol.
 Check the settings in group 58 Embedded fieldbus.
Unicos 0x5239 EFB load fault 1. The embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol firmware
could not be loaded.
2. Version mismatch between EFB protocol firmware
and thyristor power controller firmware.
 Reload the firmware. Contact your local ABB
Unicos 0x5242 Text data overflow Internal fault.
 Reset the fault. Contact your local ABB
Unicos 0x5243 Text 32-bit table overflow Internal fault.
Unicos 0x5244 Text 64-bit table overflow Internal fault.
Unicos 0x5245 Text file overflow Internal fault.
Unicos 0x5249 Task overload Internal fault.
 Reboot the thyristor power controller (using 96.08
Control board boot) or by cycling power. If the
problem persists, contact your local ABB
representative.
Unicos 0x5250 Stack overflow Internal fault.

267

code
representative.
Unicos 0x5251 Internal file load File read error.
representative.
Unicos 0x5252 Internal record load Internal record load error.
Unicos 0x5254 Memory unit detached The memory unit was detached before the thyristor
power controller was powered.
 Switch off the power to the thyristor power controller
and reinstall the memory unit.
 In case the memory unit was not actually removed
when the fault occurred, check that the memory unit
is properly inserted into its connector and its
mounting screw is tight. Reboot the thyristor power
controller (using 96.08 Control board boot) or by
cycling power. If the problem persists, contact your
local ABB representative
Unicos 0x5255 Internal SSW Internal fault.
representative.
Unicos 0x5256 User Set Loading of user parameter set failed because:
 Requested set does not exist.
 Set is not compatible with the firmware.
 The thyristor power controller was switched off
during loading.
 Ensure that a valid user parameter set exists.
Reload if uncertain.
Unicos 0x5257 Kernel overload Operating system error.
representative.
Unicos 0x5258 Parameter system Parameter load or save failed.
Try forcing a save using 96.07 Parameter save
manually. Retry.
Unicos 0x5259 Unrecoverable SW Error An unrecoverable error has occurred.
 Record fault code, auxiliary fault code and report
them to factory.
representative.
Unicos 0x5260 Licensing Running the firmware is prevented because either a
restrictive license exists, or a required license is missing.
 Record the auxiliary codes of all active licensing
faults and contact your product vendor for further
instructions.
DCT880 0x5299 Reset

268
Faults 2
code
DCT880 0x5501 Aux undervoltage  Check 24 VDC auxiliary voltage at XAUX.
Unicos 0x5508 External I/O communication The I/O extension module types specified by parameters
loss do not match the detected configuration.
 Check the auxiliary code (format XXYY YYYY). “XX”
specifies the number of the I/O extension module
(01: group 14 I/O extension module 1, 02: 15 I/O
extension module 2, 03: 16 I/O extension module 3).
“YY YYYY” indicates the problem.
 0000 0001 communication with module failed.
Check that the module is properly seated in its slot.
Check that the module and the slot connector is not
damaged.
Try installing the module into another slot.
 0000 0002 module not found, 0000 0003
configuration of module failed or 0000 0004
configuration of module failed.
Check the type and location settings of the modules
(parameters 14.01, 14.02, 15.01, 15.02, 16.01 and
16.02).
Check that the module is properly seated in its slot.
Check that the module and the slot connector is not
damaged.
Try installing the module into another slot.
DCT880 0x5525 Type code  Check 95.16 Set: Unit type code.
UNICOS 0x5545 Application loading Application file incompatible or corrupted.
 Check the auxiliary code.
 0000 8006 not enough memory for the application.
 0000 8007 the application contains the wrong library
version.
 0000 800A the application contains an unknown
target (system) library function.
UNICOS 0x5546 Control panel loss Control panel or PC tool selected as active control
location for the thyristor power controller has ceased
Programmable fault: communicating.
49.05 Communication loss  Check PC tool or control panel connection.
action  Check control panel connector.
 Replace control panel mounting platform.
UNICOS 0x5547 Hardware
UNICOS 0x5548 Internal SW error Internal error.
 Contact your local ABB representative, quoting the
auxiliary code.
UNICOS 0x5549 Parameter Compatibility
UNICOS 0x5550 Backup/Restore timeout  Check control panel / PC-tool communication and if
it is still in backup / restore state.
UNICOS 0x5551 Analog input supervision An analog signal is outside the limits specified for an
analog input.
Programmable fault:  Check the auxiliary code (format 0000 0XYY). “X”
12.03 AI supervision function specifies the location of the input (0: AI on SDCS-
CON-H; 1: I/O extension module 1, etc.), “YY”
specifies the input and limit (01: AI1 under minimum,
02: AI1 over maximum, 03: AI2 under minimum, 04:
AI2 over maximum).
 Check signal level at the analog input.
 Check the wiring connected to the input.

269

code
 Check the minimum and maximum limits of the input
in group 12 Standard AI.
User faults
code
UNICOS 0x5601 AP Fault 1 reserved
Events
Event Message Additional information
code
DCT880 0x8120 Checksum mismatch
DCT880 0x8121 Power up
DCT880 0x8130 Service started Is shown when a service is requested. E.g. 99.07
Service Mode = Thyristor Diagnosis.
DCT880 0x8131 Service success Is shown when a requested service is successfully
finished. E.g. 99.07 Service Mode = Thyristor Diagnosis.
DCT880 0x8132 Service failed Is shown when a requested service failed. E.g. 99.07
Service Mode = Thyristor Diagnosis.
DCT880 0x8140 Leg 1 Thyristor Short Circuit Thyristor diagnosis detected at least one short-circuited
thyristor in leg 1, see 99.07 Service Mode = Thyristor
Diagnosis.
Diagnosis.
Diagnosis.
DCT880 0x8143 Leg 1 Thyristor Open Circuit Thyristor diagnosis detected at least one open thyristor
in leg 1, see 99.07 Service Mode = Thyristor Diagnosis.
DCT880 0x8146 Leg 1 Internal Semiconductor Thyristor diagnosis detected at least one open
Fuse Open Circuit semiconductor fuse in leg 1, see 99.07 Service Mode =
Thyristor Diagnosis.
User events
Event Message Additional information
code
UNICOS 0x8301 AP Pure Event 1 reserved

270
Possible causes of warnings and faults, checks and measures

Overcurrent
Related codes. 2101, 2201, 2301, 3101, 3201, 3301.
Event active. Always.
Problem. The power controller detected an abnormal high RMS current.
Description (exemplary for leg 1) Related parameters

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Fault Unit output current scaling 07.17
Min.: 230 % of the unit’s rated set
current / 325 % of the rated
Unit output overcurrent 07.18
Current per leg
load current
level
Fault
Overcurrent level: in % of Load Current 99.02
rated load current Overcurrent Fault level 28.21 28.23 28.25
Warning
Overcurrent warning level: in Overcurrent Warning level 28.22 28.24 28.26
% of rated load current Fault Word bit 06.66.0 06.67.0 06.68.0
Warning word bit 06.71.0 06.72.0 06.73.0
Current RMS relative 01.33 01.34 01.35
actual
325 % of 99.02 Min
Fault Function Leg 2 / Leg - 28.20 28.20
230 % of 07.17
SET
3101
3
S Q
Reset R
CLR
Q
1.33 2101
28.22
28.21 S
SET
Q 3101
Reset R
CLR
Q
Possible causes What to check and suggested measures

Wrong parameter setting. Check parameters as listed above.
The output is short-circuited. Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals (U2 / V2 /
W2) and measure the resistance of the load. Check if the
resistance is too low.
Remove the short-circuited part (including replacement of the
wires, relay terminals and load elements).
Ground fault has occurred at the output. Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals (U2 / V2 /
W2) and perform a high voltage (megger) test.
Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the
wires, relay terminals and load elements).
Cold resistance is too low. In phase angle control (see 99.10, 99.25, 99.40 Leg x Control
Mode):
 Increase the phase angle soft start ramp (see 99.16,
99.31, 99.46 Leg x Phase Angle Soft Start Ramp).
In full wave fix cycle control (see 99.10, 99.25, 99.40 Leg x
Control Mode):
 Use Start mode: Soft Start (see 99.12, 99.27, 99.32 Leg x
Start Mode) and set up the soft start ramp.
The load resistance is too low for the Set up the current limiter in Groups 30 / 31 / 32.
reached output voltage resulting in too
high current.

271
Mains Overvoltage
Related codes. 2102, 2202, 2302, 3102, 3202, 3302.
Problem. The power controller detected an abnormal high input
voltage.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Unit input voltage 07.19
Fault scaling set
Mains voltage per leg
130 % of the unit’s rated

mains voltage Supply Voltage 99.01
Fault Mains Overvoltage 28.30 28.32 28.34
Overvoltage level: in % of
rated mains voltage Fault level
Warning
Overvoltage warning level: in Mains Overvoltage 28.31 28.33 28.35
% of rated mains voltage Warring level
Fault Word bit 06.66.1 06.67.1 06.68.1
Warning word bit 06.71.01 06.72.1 06.73.1
Mains Voltage relative 01.26 01.27 01.28
Fault Function Leg 2 / - 28.20 28.20
130 % of 07.19
Leg 3
S
SET
Q 3102
Reset R
CLR
Q
1.26 2102
28.31
28.30 S
SET
Q 3102
Reset R
CLR
Q

Mains voltage too high. Measure the mains voltage.
Mains voltage out of specification. Check the nameplate of the DCT880.
Measurement fuse broken. Check fuses (F100 … F102) on the SDCS-PIN-H.
Thyristor Short Circuit

Related codes. 2103, 2203, 2303, 3103, 3203, 3303.
Problem. The power controller detected a short-circuited thyristor.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Fault Word bit 06.66.2 06.67.2 06.68.2
Warning word bit 06.71.2 06.72.2 06.73.2
U1 U2 AVR Current forward 01.71 01.73 01.75
Thyristor relative
I1 AVR Current reverse 01.72 01.74 01.76
U1 Thyristor relative

Thyristor broken. Exchange Thyristor.

272
Thyristor Open Circuit

Related codes. 2104, 2204, 2304, 3104, 3204, 3304.
Problem. The power controller detected an open thyristor.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Fault Word bit 06.66.3 06.67.3 06.68.3
Warning word bit 06.71.3 06.72.3 06.73.3
U1 U2 AVR Current forward 01.71 01.73 01.75
Thyristor relative
I1 AVR Current reverse 01.72 01.74 01.76
U1 Thyristor relative

Thyristor broken. Exchange Thyristor.
Mains Undervoltage
Related codes. 2105, 2205, 2305, 3105, 3205, 3305.
Event active. At Enable 2 s delay, at Run undelayed, see 06.08 Used Main
Control Word.
Problem. The power controller detected an abnormal low input voltage.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Undervoltage warning level: in
Supply Voltage 99.01
Mains Undervoltage 28.40 28.44 28.48
Mains voltage per leg
% of rated mains voltage

Warning short time Fault level
Undervoltage delayed level: in
Enable Local I/O 19.01 19.03 19.05
% of rated mains voltage
Fault Mains Undervoltage 28.41 28.45 28.49
Undervoltage short time level: Fault level
in % of rated mains voltage Undervoltage Fault 28.42 28.46 28.50
Fault
delay time
Undervoltage Warning 28.43 28.47 28.51
level
Fault Word bit 06.66.4 06.67.4 06.68.4
28.40 Warning word bit 06.71.4 06.72.4 06.73.4
S
SET
Q 3105
Reset R
CLR
Q
Mains Voltage relative 01.26 01.27 01.28
1.26
Fault Function Leg 2 / - 28.20 28.20
28.43 2105
Leg 3
28.41 28.42 t S
SET
Q 3105
Reset R
CLR
Q

Mains contactor is controlled by the Suppress the short time mains undervoltage fault by means
overriding control. of 19.01 Leg 1 Enable Local I/O = 19.03 Leg 2 Enable Local
I/O = 19.05 Leg 3 Enable Local I/O = Mains ON.
Mains voltage too low. Measure the mains voltage.
Possible power dip. Check factory recordings / information.
Mains voltage out of specification. Check the nameplate of the DCT880.
External / Internal line fuse broken. Check and exchange external / internal line fuses.

273
Unit Thermal Overload

Related codes. 2154, 2254, 2354, 3154, 3254, 3354.
Event active. At Run, see 06.08 Used Main Control Word.
Problem. The power controller detected a thermal overload in the unit.
The load current is constantly over the unit’s rated current.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Unit output current 07.17
scaling set
Unit Overload Function 36.35 37.35 38.35
Unit Overload level 36.36 37.36 38.36
Unit Overload time 36.37 37.37 38.37
Fault Word bit 06.66.5 06.67.5 06.68.5
Warning word bit 06.71.5 06.72.5 06.73.5
Current RMS actual 01.30 01.31 01.32

Unit out of specification. Check the nameplate of the DCT880.
The load resistance is too low for the Set up the current limiter in Groups 30 / 31 / 32.
reached output voltage resulting in too high
current.
External Event 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5
Related codes. 1201 … 1205 / 5211 … 5215.
Event active. The event is low active. 0 = active and 1 = inactive.
Activate the event using parameter.
Problem. The power controller detected an external warning or fault.
Note:
The power controller itself is operating without problems.

External event 1 source 28.01
External event 1 28.02 External event 1 External event 1 type 28.02
28.01
source type External event 1 indication 06.63.0
Other [bit]
Active Warning
1201 External event 2 source 28.03
Inactive 6.63.0 External event 2 type 28.04
Fault
DI1 S
SET
Q 5211
DI2 Reset R
CLR
Q
External event 2 indication 06.63.1
… External event 3 source 28.05
DI6
DIO1 External event 3 type 28.06
DIO2 External event 3 indication 06.63.2
DIL
External event 4 type 28.08
External event 5 type 28.10

External signal is low. Check external signal.
Note:
The power controller itself is operating without problems.
If you need high active behavior, use selection Other [bit] and
invert it.

274
Parameter Setting Mismatch

Related codes. 1132.
Problem. The power controller detected a parameter settings
mismatch.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Warning word bit 06.62.0
Supply Configuration 99.04
Load Configuration 99.05

Wrong parameter setting. See AUX codes in the event log and check parameters.
Load Loss
Related codes. 2151, 2251, 2351, 3151, 3251, 3351.
Problem. The power controller detected a total load loss.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
I Load Loss Function 36.10 37.10 38.10
Imax Load Loss activation time 36.11 37.11 38.11
Load Loss Current level 36.12 37.12 38.12
Supervised Load Loss Alpha level 36.13 37.13 38.13
area
Fault Word bit 06.76.0 06.77.0 06.78.0
36.12 Leg 1 Load Warning word bit 06.81.0 06.82.0 06.83.0
Loss Current level Current RMS actual 01.30 01.31 01.32
α U
Power actual 01.50 01.51 01.52
U=0 Umax Resistance actual 36.01 37.01 38.01
α = 180° α = 0° 3ph Resistance actual 36.02 37.02 38.02
36.13 Leg 1 Load
Loss Alpha level

Load. Check the loads and the connections.

275
Partial Load Loss

Related codes. 2152, 2252, 2352, 3152, 3252, 3352.
Problem. The power controller detected a partial load loss.
A static change in resistance of the load is detected.

All elements must be connected in parallel Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
and must have same characteristics and Parallel Elements 36.15 37.15 38.15
identical impedance. Partial Load Loss Function 36.20 37.20 38.20
Partial Load Loss 36.21 37.21 38.21
activation time
Partial Load Loss level 36.22 37.22 38.22
Partial Load Loss delay 36.23 37.23 38.23
time
Fault Word bit 06.76.1 06.77.1 06.78.1
Warning word bit 06.81.1 06.82.1 06.83.1
Power actual 01.50 01.51 01.52
Resistance actual 36.01 37.01 38.01
3ph Resistance actual 36.02 37.02 38.02
Initial resistance 36.41 37.41 37.41

Partial Load Short Circuit

Related codes. 2153, 2253, 2353, 3153, 3253, 3353.
Problem. The power controller detected a partial load short circuit.
A static change in resistance of the load is detected.

All elements must be connected in series Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
and must have same characteristics and Serial Elements 36.16 37.16 38.16
identical impedance values. Partial Load Short Function 36.25 37.25 38.25
Partial Load Short 36.26 37.26 38.26
activation time
Partial Load Short level 36.27 37.27 38.27
Partial Load Short delay 36.28 37.28 38.28
time
Fault Word bit 06.76.2 06.77.2 06.78.2
Warning word bit 06.81.2 06.82.2 06.83.2
Power actual 01.50 01.51 01.52
Initial resistance 36.41 37.41 37.41

Load Overload
Related codes. 2155, 2255, 2355, 3155, 3255, 3355.

276
Problem. The power controller detected a load overload (I²t integral).

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Load Overload Function 36.30 37.30 38.30
Load Overload level 36.31 37.31 38.31
Load Overload time 36.32 37.32 38.32
Fault Word bit 06.76.3 06.77.3 06.78.3
Warning word bit 06.81.3 06.82.3 06.83.3
actual

Check setting of 99.02 Load Current.
Load Aging
Related codes. 2157, 2257, 2357, 3157, 3257, 3357.
Problem. The power controller detected a static change in the load
resistance.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
36.01
36.41 ++
Resistance change 36.40 37.40 38.40
36.42 36.40 function
36.01 >1 2157
36.41 +-
36.44
t
S
SET
Q 3157 Initial Resistance 36.41 37.41 38.41
36.42 Reset
Resistance change level 36.42 37.42 38.42
CLR
R Q
Resistance Change 36.44 37.44 38.44

activation time
Fault Word bit 06.76.4 06.77.4 06.78.4
Warning word bit 06.81.4 06.82.4 06.83.4


277
Load Current Imbalance

Related codes. 2158, 2258, 2358, 3158, 3258, 3358.
Problem. The power controller detected a load current imbalance in a
symmetrical 3-phase load configuration. The highest and
lowest load current are compared and they are out of range.

Leg 1 Leg 2 Leg 3
Load Current Imbalance 36.50 - -
Function
activation time
level
delay time
Fault Word bit 06.76.5 06.77.5 06.78.5
Warning word bit 06.81.5 06.82.5 06.83.5
actual


278
Appendix
Firmware overview diagram
Appendix

279
Command chain diagram
Appendix

280
Appendix

Diagram of data transfer via F-type fieldbus adapter using FBA and transparent 16 bit profile
281
Leg 1 state machine
Appendix

282
Leg 2 state machine
Appendix

283
Leg 3 state machine
Appendix

284
Leg 1 Reference chain diagram
Appendix

285
Appendix

286
Appendix

287
Appendix

288
Appendix

289
Appendix

290
Appendix

291
Appendix

292
Appendix

293
Master - follower communication (Master)
Appendix

294
Master - follower communication (Follower)
Appendix

295
Process PID 1 Setpoint
Appendix

296
Process PID 1 Feedback
Appendix

297
Process PID 1 Output
Appendix

Ident. No.: 3ADW000431R0501 Rev E
 
ABB Automation Products

Wallstadter-Straße 59
68526 Ladenburg • Germany *431R0501A5510000*
Tel: +49 (0) 6203-71-0 *431R0501A5510000*
Fax: +49 (0) 6203-71-76 09
www.abb.com/dc-drives

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCT880

Installation and maintenance work

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Printed circuit boards

ABB order no.: 3ADV050035P0001

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Group 36 Leg 1 Load monitoring ........................................................................................................... 184

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

DCT880 Manuals and Tools

Manuals and Tools

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Manuals and Tools

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Production year 2015 and week 46

The thyristor power controller’s basic type code: DCT880-AAB-CCCC-DDEF

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Precautions for using thyristor power controllers

Checking the insulation of the assembly

1. Check that the cables to the connected equipment are disconnected

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

System connection Environmental limit values

Current reduction to % of Current reduction to % of

Current reduction to % of nominal thyristor power controller current

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

European Union Directive Manufacturer's assurance Harmonized Standards

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

400 V / 525 V units, current and power ratings

690 V units, current and power ratings

Size I Pout Ploss W03 Ploss W02 Air flow Auxiliary

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Size I Thyristor power controller Thyristor power controller

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Installation and wiring

Free space around the unit

Parallel units Distance

Preventing cooling air recirculation Unit above another

Lead the exhaust cooling air away from the unit

Installing and wiring

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Dimensions and weights

Size Thyristor power controller h  w  d [mm] weight [kg]

Installing and wiring

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Size Thyristor power controller h  w  d [mm] weight [kg]

Installing and wiring

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Size Thyristor power controller h  w  d [mm] weight [kg]

Installing and wiring

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Size Thyristor power controller h  w  d [mm] weight [kg]

Installing and wiring

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Size Thyristor power controller h  w  d [mm] weight [kg]

Installing and wiring

3ADW000431R0501 DCT880 Manual e e

Fan terminals and cooling air duct sizes

Installing and wiring